WO2007133746A2 - Use of nogo receptor-1 (ngr1) antagonists for promoting oligodendrocyte survival - Google Patents
Use of nogo receptor-1 (ngr1) antagonists for promoting oligodendrocyte survival Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2007133746A2 WO2007133746A2 PCT/US2007/011557 US2007011557W WO2007133746A2 WO 2007133746 A2 WO2007133746 A2 WO 2007133746A2 US 2007011557 W US2007011557 W US 2007011557W WO 2007133746 A2 WO2007133746 A2 WO 2007133746A2
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- ngrl
- seq
- polypeptide
- antibody
- amino acids
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
- C07K14/705—Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
- A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
- A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/02—Nutrients, e.g. vitamins, minerals
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
Definitions
- This invention relates to neurobiology, neurology and pharmacology. More particularly, it relates to methods of promoting oligodendrocyte survival by the administration of Nogo receptor-1 (NgRl) antagonists.
- NgRl Nogo receptor-1
- Oligodendrocytes undergo apoptotic cell death following spinal cord injury (SCI), which may contribute to demyelination of survived axons and prevent function recovery.
- SCI spinal cord injury
- p75 the neurotrophin receptor, is upregulated after SCI and responsible for the death of oligodendrocytes. Beattie et al, Neuron 35:375-386 . (2002) and Dubreuil et al, J. Cell. Biol. I62(2):233-243 (2003).
- p75 has been identified as a coreceptor of the NgR/Lingo-1 (Sp35)/Taj/p75 receptor complex. Wang et al, Nature 420(6911):74-78 (2002), Park et al, Neuron 4J(5):815 (2005), and Shao et al, Neuron 45(3):353-359 (2005). p75-mediated cell death has also been associated with activation of an intracellular GTPase, Rho-A. Li et al, J. Neurosci. 24(46):10511-10520 (2004).
- NgRl Nogo receptor
- soluble NgR-310-Fc significantly improved motor function recovery and axonal regeneration after SCI by blocking the Nogo signaling pathway.
- therapies to prevent oligodendrocyte cell death and demyelination of axons following spinal cord injury and other diseases involved in oligodendrocyte death and demyelination are also needed.
- the present invention is based on the discovery that certain antagonists of NgRl promote survival of oligodendrocytes as well as reducing demyelination of neurons. Based on these discoveries, the invention relates generally to methods of reducing demyelination and promoting survival of oligodendrocytes by the administration of a NgRl antagonist.
- the invention provides a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes, comprising contacting the oligodendrocytes with an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist.
- the invention includes a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes in a mammal, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist.
- the invention includes a method for reducing demyelination of neurons, comprising contacting a mixture of neurons and oligodendrocytes with a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist.
- the invention includes a method for reducing demyelination of neurons in a mammal, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a NgRl antagonist.
- the mammal has been diagnosed with a disease, disorder, injury or condition involving oligodendrocyte death or demyelination or dysmyelination.
- the disease, disorder, injury or condition is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease.
- the disease, disorder, or injury is spinal cord injury.
- the invention includes a method of treating a disease, disorder or injury in a mammal involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antaonist.
- Additional embodiments include a method of treating a disease, disorder or injury in a mammal involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin comprising (a) providing a cultured host cell expressing a recombinant NgRl antagonist; and (b) introducing the host cell into the mammal at or near the site of the nervous system disease, disorder or injury.
- the disease, disorder or injury is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), Globoid cell Leucodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's 'disease, Parkinson's
- MS multiple sclerosis
- PML progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy
- EPL encephalomyelitis
- CPMZ central pontine myelolysis
- adrenoleukodystrophy Alexander's disease
- PMZ Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease
- the cultured host cell is derived from the mammal to be treated.
- the vector is a viral vector which is selected from the group consisting of an adenoviral vector, an alphavirus vector, an enterovirus vector, a pestivirus vector, a lentiviral vector, a baculoviral vector, a herpesvirus vector, an Epstein Barr viral vector, a papovaviral vector, a poxvirus vector, a vaccinia viral vector, and a herpes simplex viral vector.
- the disease, disorder or injury is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), Globoid cell Leucodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, post radiation injury, neurologic complications of chemotherapy, stroke, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency, isolated vitamin E deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Kornzweig syndrome, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, and Bell's pal
- the NgRl antagonist is selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody and an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide (e.g., RNA interference), an NgRl aptamer, or a combination of two or more NgRl antagonists.
- soluble Sp35 polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, soluble NgRl polypeptide that are 90% identical to a reference
- amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2 amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; and a combination of one ore more of said reference amino acid sequences.
- the soluble NgRl polypeptide for use in the methods of the present invention is selected from the group consisting of: amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ 3D NO:2; amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; variants or derivatives of any of said polypeptide fragments; and a combination of at least two of said polypeptide fragments or variants or derivatives thereof.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention comprises an NgRl antibody, or fragment thereof that binds
- the Ngrl antagonist comprises a a soluble NgRl polypeptide wherein at least one cysteine residue is substituted with a different amino acid.
- the at least one cysteine residue is C266.
- the at least one cysteine residue is C309.
- the at least one cysteine residue is C335.
- the at least one cysteine residue is at C336.
- the at least one cysteine residue is substituted with a different amino acid selected from the group consisting of alanine, serine and threonine.
- the replacement amino acid is alanine.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention comprises an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of an antisense polynucleotide; a ribozyme; a small interfering RNA (siRNA); and a small-hairpin RNA (shRNA). .
- the NgRl antagonist polynucleotide for use in the present methods is an antisense polynucleotide comprising at least 10 bases complementary to the coding portion of the NgRl mRNA.
- the polynucleotide is a ribozyme.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a siRNA or a shRNA. En some embodiments, the invention provides that that siRNA or the shRNA inhibits NgRl expression. In some embodiments, the invention further
- siRNA or shRNA is at least 90% identical to the nucleotide sequence comprising: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or
- siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO: 8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
- the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is complementary to the mRNA produced by the polynucleotide sequence GATGAAGAGGGCGTCCGCT (SEQ ID NO:9) or GGGCCTGGCTGCAGAAGTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) or GACTGGTGACTCAGAAGGC (SEQ ID NO: 13).
- the NgRl antagonist is administered by bolus injection or chronic infusion.
- the soluble NgRl polypeptide is administered directly into the central nervous system.
- the soluble NgRl polypeptide is administered directly into a chronic lesion of MS.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a soluble NgRl polypeptide that is cyclic.
- the cyclic polypeptide further comprises a first molecule linked at the N-terminus and a second molecule linked at the C-terminus; wherein the first molecule and the second molecule are joined to each other to form said cyclic molecule.
- the first and second molecules are selected from the group consisting of: a biotin molecule, a cysteine residue, and an acetylated cysteine residue.
- the first molecule is a biotin molecule attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention.
- the first molecule is an acetylated cysteine residue attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention.
- the first molecule is an acetylated cysteine residue attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention.
- the C-terminal cysteine has an NH2 moiety attached.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a fusion polypeptide comprising a non-NgRl moiety.
- the non-NgRl moiety is selected from the group consisting of an antibody Ig moiety, a serum albumin moiety, a targeting moiety, a reporter moiety, and a purification-facilitating moiety.
- the antibody Ig moiety is a hinge and Fc moiety.
- the polypeptides and antibodies of the present invention are conjugated to a polymer.
- the polymer is selected from the group consisting of a polyalkylene glycol, a sugar polymer, and a polypeptide.
- the polyalkylene glycol is polyethylene glycol (PEG).
- the polypeptides and antibodies of the present invention are conjugated to 1, 2, 3 or 4 polymers.
- the total molecular weight of the polymers is from 5,000 Da to 100,000 Da.
- Figure IA-B shows the effect of NgRl-310-Fc on post-spinal cord injury (SCI) apoptosis of oligodendrocytes.
- Figure 2A-B shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on SAPK/JNK phosphorylation
- Figure 3A-B shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on caspase-3 activation in oligodendrocytes following SCI.
- Figure 4 shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on degraded myelin basic protein
- a or “an” entity refers to one or more of that entity; for example, “an immunoglobulin molecule,” is understood to represent one or more immunoglobulin molecules.
- the terms “a” (or “an”), “one or more,” and “at least one” can be used interchangeably herein.
- a “therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary, to achieve a desired therapeutic result.
- a therapeutic result may be, e.g.,, lessening of symptoms, prolonged survival, improved mobility, and the like.
- a therapeutic result need not be a "cure”.
- a prophylactically effective amount refers to an amount effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary, to achieve the desired prophylactic result. Typically, since a prophylactic dose is used in subjects prior to or at an earlier stage of disease, the prophylactically effective amount will be less than the therapeutically effective amount.
- a "polynucleotide” can contain the nucleotide sequence of the full length cDNA sequence, including the untranslated 5' and 3' sequences, the coding sequences, as well as fragments, epitopes, domains, and variants of the nucleic acid sequence.
- the polynucleotide can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA.
- polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double- stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-
- polynucleotides can be composed of triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA.
- polynucleotides may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons.
- Modified bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine.
- a variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, "polynucleotide” embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms.
- a polypeptide can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, e.g., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids (e.g. non-naturally occuring amino acids).
- the polypeptides of the present invention may be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini.
- polypeptides may be branched , for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods.
- Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.
- fragment when referring to an NgRl antagonist of the present invention include any antagonist molecules which retain at least some ability to inhibit NgRl activity.
- NgRl antagonists as described herein may include fragment, variant, or derivative molecules therein without limitation, so long as the NgRl antagonist still serves its function.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may include NgRl proteolytic fragments, deletion fragments and in particular, fragments which more easily reach the site of action when delivered to an animal.
- Polypeptide fragments further include any portion of the polypeptide which comprises an antigenic or immunogenic epitope of the native polypeptide, including linear as well as three-dimensional epitopes.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may comprise variant NgRl regions, including fragments as described above, and also polypeptides with altered amino acid sequences due to amino acid substitutions, deletions, or insertions. Variants may occur naturally, such as an allelic variant. By an "allelic variant" is intended alternate forms of a gene occupying a given locus on a chromosome of an organism. Genes ⁇ , Lewin, B., ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1985).
- Non-naturally occurring variants may be produced using art-known mutagenesis techniques.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides may comprise conservative or non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions or additions.
- NgRl antagonists of the present invention may also include derivative molecules.
- soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may include NgRl regions which have been altered so as to exhibit additional features not found on the native polypeptide. Examples include fusion proteins and protein conjugates.
- polypeptide fragment refers to a short amino acid sequence of an NgRl polypeptide. Protein fragments may be "free-standing,” or comprised within a larger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part of region. Representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising about 5 amino acids, about 10 amino acids, about 15 amino acids, about 20 amino acids, about 30 amino acids, about 40 amino acids, about 50 amino acids, about 60 amino acids, about 70 amino acids, about 80 amino acids, about 90 amino acids, and about 100 amino acids in length.
- the NgRl antagonists for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein are "antibody” or “immunoglobulin” molecules, or immunospecific fragments thereof, e.g., naturally occurring antibody or immunoglobulin molecules or engineered antibody molecules or fragments that bind antigen in a manner similar to antibody molecules.
- antibody and “immunoglobulin” are used interchangeably herein.
- - 9 - immunoglobulin comprises at least the variable domain of a heavy chain, and normally comprises at least the variable domains of a heavy chain and a light chain.
- Basic immunoglobulin structures in vertebrate systems are relatively well understood. See, e.g., Harlow et ah, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988).
- immunoglobulin comprises five broad classes of polypeptides that can be distinguished biochemically. All five classes are clearly within the scope of the present invention, the following discussion will generally be directed to the IgG class of immunoglobulin molecules.
- IgG a standard immunoglobulin molecule comprises two identical light chain polypeptides of molecular weight approximately 23,000 Daltons, and two identical heavy chain polypeptides of molecular weight 53,000-70,000. The four chains are typically joined by disulfide bonds in a "Y" configuration wherein the light chains bracket the heavy chains starting at the mouth of the "Y” and continuing through the variable region.
- both the light and heavy chains are divided into regions of structural and functional homology.
- the terms "constant” and “variable” are used functionally.
- the variable domains of both the light (V L ) and heavy (V H ) chain portions determine antigen recognition and specificity.
- the constant domains of the light chain (C L ) and the heavy chain (C H I, C H 2 or C H 3) confer important biological properties such as secretion, transplacental mobility, Fc receptor binding, complement binding, and the like.
- the numbering of the constant region domains increases as they become more distal from the antigen binding site or amino-terminus of the antibody.
- the N-terrninal portion is a variable region and at the C-terminal portion is a constant region; the C H 3 and C L domains actually comprise the carboxy-terminus of the heavy and light chain, respectively.
- Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda (K, ⁇ ). Each heavy chain class may be bound with either a kappa or lambda light chain. In general, the light and heavy chains are covalently bonded to each other, and the "tail" portions of the two heavy chains are bonded to each other by covalent disulfide linkages or non-covalent linkages when the immunoglobulins are generated either by hybridomas, B cells or genetically engineered host cells.
- heavy chain the amino acid sequences run from an N-terminus at the forked ends of the Y configuration to the C-terminus at the bottom of each chain.
- heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, ( ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ) with some subclasses among them (e.g., ⁇ l- ⁇ 4). It is the nature of this chain that
- variable region allows the antibody to selectively recognize and specifically bind epitopes on antigens.
- the V L domain and V H domain of an antibody combine to form the variable region that defines a three dimensional antigen binding site.
- This quaternary antibody structure forms the antigen binding site present at the end of each arm of the Y. More specifically, the antigen binding site is defined by three complementary determining regions (CDRs) on each of the V H and VL chains.
- CDRs complementary determining regions
- a complete immunoglobulin molecule may consist of heavy chains only, with no light chains. See, e.g., Hamers-Casterman et al., Nature 555:446-448 (1993).
- each antigen binding domain is short, non-contiguous sequences of amino acids that are specifically positioned to form the antigen binding domain as the antibody assumes its three dimensional configuration in an aqueous environment.
- the remainder of the amino acids in the antigen binding domains referred to as "framework” regions, show less inter-molecular variability.
- the framework regions largely adopt a ⁇ -sheet conformation and the CDRs form loops which connect, and in some cases form part of, the ⁇ -sheet structure.
- framework regions act to form a scaffold that provides for positioning the CDRs in correct orientation by inter-chain, non-covalent interactions.
- the antigen binding domain formed by the positioned CDRs defines a surface complementary to the epitope on the immunoreactive antigen. This complementary surface promotes the non-covalent binding of the antibody to its cognate epitope.
- the amino acids comprising the CDRs and the framework regions, respectively can be readily identified for any given heavy or light chain variable region by one of ordinary skill in the art, since they have been precisely defined (see, "Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest,” Kabat, E., et al, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, (1983); and Chothia and Lesk, J. MoL Biol. : 196:901-917 (1987), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties).
- V H H the heavy chain variable region
- the main differences between camelid V H H variable regions and those derived from conventional antibodies (V H ) include (a) more hydrophobic amino acids in the light chain contact surface of VH as compared to the corresponding region in V H H, (b) a longer CDR3 in V H H, and (c) the frequent occurrence of a disulfide bond between CDRl and CDR3 in V H H.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least one heavy or light chain CDR of an antibody molecule.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least two CDRs from one or more antibody molecules.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least three CDRs from one or more antibody molecules.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least four CDRs from one or more antibody molecules.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least five CDRs from one or more antibody molecules.
- an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least six CDRs from one or more antibody molecules.
- Exemplary antibody molecules comprising at least one CDR that can be included in the subject antigen binding molecules are known in the art and exemplary molecules are described herein.
- Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal, monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized, primatized, or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, epitope-binding fragments, e.g., Fab, Fab 1 and F(ab')2, Fd, Fvs, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chain antibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv), fragments comprising either a VL or VH domain, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, and anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to binding molecules disclosed herein).
- Immunoglobulin or antibody molecules of the invention can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA, and IgY), class (e.g., IgGi, IgG 2 , IgG 3 , IgG 4 , IgA 1 and IgA 2 ) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule.
- Antibody fragments, including single-chain antibodies may comprise the variable region(s) alone or in combination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hinge region, C H I, C H 2, and C H 3 domains.
- antigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variable region(s) with a hinge region, C H I, C H 2, and CH3 domains.
- Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein may be from any animal origin including birds and
- the antibodies are human, murine, donkey, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, llama, horse, or chicken antibodies.
- the variable region may be condricthoid in origin (e.g., from sharks).
- "human” antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence of a human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from human immunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or more human immunoglobulins and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins, as described infra and, for example in, U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,598 by Kucherlapati et al.
- heavy chain portion includes amino acid sequences derived from an immunoglobulin heavy chain.
- a polypeptide comprising a heavy chain portion comprises at least one of: a C H I domain, a hinge (e.g., upper, middle, and/or lower hinge region) domain, a C H 2 domain, a C H 3 domain, or a variant or fragment thereof.
- a binding polypeptide for use in the invention may comprise a polypeptide chain comprising a C H I domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a C H I domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, and a C H 2 domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a C H I domain and a C H 3 domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a C H I domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, and a C H 3 domain, or a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, a C H 2 domain, and a C H 3 domain.
- a polypeptide of the invention comprises a polypeptide chain comprising a C H 3 domain.
- a binding polypeptide for use in the invention may lack at least a portion of a C H 2 domain (e.g., all or part of a C H 2 domain).
- these domains e.g., the heavy chain portions
- these domains may be modified such that they vary in amino acid sequence from the naturally occurring immunoglobulin molecule.
- the heavy chain portions of one polypeptide chain of a multimer are identical to those on a second polypeptide chain of the multimer.
- heavy chain portion-containing monomers for use in the methods of the invention are not identical.
- each monomer may comprise a different target binding site, forming, for example, a bispecific antibody.
- the heavy chain portions of a binding polypeptide for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein may be derived from different immunoglobulin molecules.
- a heavy chain portion of a polypeptide may comprise a CHI domain derived from an IgGi molecule and a hinge region derived from an IgG3 molecule.
- a heavy chain portion can comprise a hinge region derived, in part, from an IgGi molecule and,
- a heavy chain portion can comprise a chimeric hinge derived, in part, from an IgGi molecule and, in part, from an' IgG 4 molecule.
- the term "light chain portion" includes amino acid sequences derived from an immunoglobulin light chain.
- the light chain portion comprises at least one of a V L or C L domain.
- An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a non-natural variant of a polypeptide derived from an immunoglobulin can be created by introducing one or more nucleotide substitutions, additions or deletions into the nucleotide sequence of the immunoglobulin such that one or more amino acid substitutions, additions or deletions are introduced into the encoded protein. Mutations may be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR- mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more non-essential amino acid residues.
- binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 x W 2 M, 10 "2 M, 5 x 10 "3 M, 10 '3 M, 5 x 1(T 4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 x 10 "5 M, Kr 5 M, 5 x 10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5 x 10 "7 M, 1(T 7 M, 5 x 1(T 8 M, 1(T 8 M, 5 x 10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5 x 10 '10 M, l ⁇ r 10 M, 5 x 10 "11 M, 10 "11 M, 5 x 10 "12 M 5 10 "12 M, 5 x 10 "13 M, lO "13 M, 5 x 10 "14 M, 10 "14 M 5 5 x 10 "15 M, or 10 '15
- Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein act as antagonists of NgRl as described herein.
- an antibody for use in the methods of the present invention may function as an antagonist, blocking or inhibiting the suppressive activity of the NgRlpolypeptide.
- chimeric antibody will be held to mean any antibody wherein the immunoreactive region or site is obtained or derived from a first species and the constant region (which may be intact, . partial or modified in accordance with the instant invention) is obtained from a second species.
- the target binding region or site will be from a non-human source (e.g. mouse or primate) and the constant region is human.
- engineered antibody refers to an antibody in which the variable domain in either the heavy and light chain or both is altered by at least partial replacement of one or more CDRs from an antibody of known specificity and, if necessary, by partial framework region replacement and sequence changing.
- CDRs may be
- the CDRs will be derived from an antibody of different class and preferably from an antibody from a different species.
- An engineered antibody in which one or more "donor" CDRs from a non-human antibody of known specificity is grafted into a human heavy or light chain framework region is referred to herein as a "humanized antibody.” It may not be necessary to replace all of the CDRs with the complete CDRs from the donor variable region to transfer the antigen binding capacity of one variable domain to another. Rather, it may only be necessary to transfer those residues that are necessary to maintain the activity of the target binding site.
- the resulting recombinant fusion protein is a single protein containing two ore more segments that correspond to polypeptides encoded by the original ORFs (which segments are not normally so joined in nature.) Although the reading frame is thus made continuous throughout the fused segments, the segments may be physically or spatially separated by, for example, in-frame linker sequence.
- a "linear sequence” or a “sequence” is an order of amino acids in a polypeptide in an amino to carboxyl terminal direction in which residues that neighbor each other in the sequence are contiguous in the primary structure of the polypeptide.
- expression refers to a process by which a gene produces a biochemical, for example, an RNA or polypeptide. The process includes any manifestation of the functional presence of the gene within the cell including, without limitation, gene knockdown as well as both transient expression and stable expression.
- RNA messenger RNA
- tRNA transfer RNA
- shRNA small hairpin RNA
- siRNA small interfering RNA
- expression includes the creation of that biochemical and any precursors.
- subject or “individual” or “animal” or “patient” or “mammal,” is meant any subject, particularly a mammalian subject, for whom diagnosis, prognosis, or therapy is desired.
- Mammalian subjects include, but are not limited to, humans, domestic animals, farm animals, zoo animals, sport animals, pet animals such as dogs, cats, guinea pigs, rabbits, rats, mice, horses, cattle, cows; primates such as apes, monkeys, orangutans, and chimpanzees; canids such as dogs and wolves; felids such as cats, lions, and tigers; equids such as horses, donkeys, and zebras; food animals such as cows, pigs, and sheep; ungulates such as deer and giraffes; rodents such as mice, rats, hamsters and guinea pigs; and so on.
- the mammal is a human subject.
- RNA interference refers to the silencing or decreasing of gene expression by siRNAs. It is the process of sequence-specific, post-transcriptional gene silencing in animals and plants, initiated by siRNA that is homologous in its duplex region to the sequence of the silenced gene.
- the gene may be endogenous or exogenous to the organism, present integrated into a chromosome or present in a transfection vector that is not integrated into the genome. The expression of the gene is either completely or partially inhibited.
- RNAi may also be considered to inhibit the function of a target RNA; the function of the target RNA may be complete or partial.
- the invention is based on the discovery that antagonists of NgRl increase oligodendrocyte numbers by promoting their survival.
- the rat NgRl polypeptide is shown below as SEQ ID NO: 1.
- mouse polypeptide is shown below as SEQ ID NO :3.
- Full-length Nogo receptor- 1 consists of a signal sequence, a N-terminus region (NT), eight leucine rich repeats (LRR), a LRRCT region (a leucine rich repeat domain C- terminal of the eight leucine rich repeats), a C-terminus region (CT) and a GPI anchor.
- NT N-terminus region
- LRR leucine rich repeats
- LRRCT region a leucine rich repeat domain C- terminal of the eight leucine rich repeats
- C-terminus region C-terminus region
- GPI anchor GPI anchor
- One embodiment of the present invention provides methods for treating a disease, disorder or injury associated with demyelination, e.g., spinal cord injury, the method comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering to the animal an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody and an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide.
- an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody and an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide.
- the invention is directed to a method for reducing demyelination of neurons in a mammal comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
- an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
- An additional embodiment of the present invention provides methods for treating a disease, disorder or injury associated with oligodendrocyte death, e.g., spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease or globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease), in an animal suffering from such disease, the method comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering to the animal an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer, or a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists
- an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer, or a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists
- Another aspect of the invention includes a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes in a mammal comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination thereof.
- an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination thereof.
- NgRl antagonist e.g., a soluble NgRlpolypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide or an NgRl aptamer, to be used in treatment methods disclosed herein, can be prepared and used as a therapeutic agent that stops, reduces, prevents, or inhibits demyelination of axons. Additionally, the NgRl antagonist to be used in treatment methods disclosed herein can be prepared and used as a therapeutic agent tliat stops, reduces, prevents, or inhibits oligodendrocyte death.
- an NgRl antagonist can be administered via direct administration of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl antibody, NgRl antagonist polynucleotide or NgRl aptamer to the patient.
- the NgRl antagonist can be administered via an expression vector which produces the specific NgRl antagonist.
- an NgRl antagonist is administered in a treatment method that includes: (1) transforming or transfecting an implantable host cell with a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid, e.g.
- the transformed host cell can be implanted at the site of a chronic lesion of MS.
- the implantable host cell is removed from a mammal, temporarily cultured, transformed or transfected with an isolated nucleic acid encoding an antagonist, and implanted back into the same mammal from which it was removed.
- the cell can be, but is not required to be, removed from the same site at which it is implanted.
- ex vivo gene therapy can provide a continuous supply of the antagonist, localized at the site of action, for a limited period of time.
- Diseases or disorders which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include diseases, disorders or injuries which relate to dysmyelination or demyelination of mammalian neurons. Specifically, diseases and disorders in which the myelin which surrounds the neuron is either absent, incomplete, not formed properly or is deteriorating.
- Such disease include, but are not limited to, multiple sclerosis (MS) including relapsing remitting, secondary progressive and primary progressive forms of MS; progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease), Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis and transvere myelitis.
- MS multiple sclerosis
- PMZ Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease
- Krabbe's disease globoid cell leukodystrophy
- Wallerian Degeneration optic neuritis and transvere myelitis.
- Diseases or disorders which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include diseases, disorders or injuries which relate to the death of oligodendrocytes. Such disease include, but are not limited to, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration.
- Diseases or disorders, which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include neuro degenerate disease or disorders. Such diseases include, but are not limited to, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
- Examples of additional diseases, disorders or injuries which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited, to spinal cord injuries, chronic myelopathy or rediculopathy, tramatic brain injury, motor neuron disease, axonal shearing, contusions, paralysis, post radiation damage or other neurological complications of chemotherapy, stroke, large lacunes, medium to large vessel occlusions,
- Soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention comprise an NT domain; 8 LRRs and an LRRCT domain and lack a signal sequence and a functional GPI anchor (i.e., no GPI anchor or a GPI anchor that lacks the ability to efficiently associate to a cell membrane).
- a functional GPI anchor i.e., no GPI anchor or a GPI anchor that lacks the ability to efficiently associate to a cell membrane.
- Table 1 above describes the various domains of the NgRlpolypeptide.
- a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide for use in the present methods comprises a heterologous LRR.
- a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide comprises 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 heterologous LRRs.
- a heterologous LRR means an LRR obtained from a protein other than Nogo receptor-1.
- Exemplary proteins from which a heterologous LRR can be obtained are toll-like receptor (TLRl.2); T-cell activation leucine repeat rich protein; deceorin; oligodendrocyte-myelin glycoprotein (OMgp)+; insulin-like growth factor binding protein acidic labile subunit slit and robo; and toll-like receptor 4.
- soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide of 319 amino acids (soluble Nogo receptor-1 344, sNogoRl-344, or sNogoR344) (residues 26-344 of SEQ ID NOs:4 and 6 or residues 27- 344 of SEQ DD NO:6) for use in the methods of the invention.
- the invention provides a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide of 285 amino acids (soluble Nogo receptor-1 310, sNogoRl-310, or sNogoR310) (residues 26-310 of SEQ ID NOs: 5 and 7 or residues 27-310 of SEQ ID NO:7) for use in the methods of the invention.
- Additional soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include soluble NgRl polypeptides with amino acid substitutions.
- Exemplary amino acid substitutions for polypeptide fragments . according to this embodiment include substitutions of individual cysteine residues in the polypeptides of the invention with different amino acids. Any heterologous amino acid may be substituted for a cysteine in the polypeptides of the invention. Which different amino acid is used depends on a number of criteria, for example, the effect of the substitution on the conformation of the polypeptide fragment, the charge of the polypeptide fragment, or the hydrophilicity of the polypeptide fragment.
- the cysteine is substituted with a small uncharged amino acid which is least likely to alter the three dimensional conformation of the polypeptide, e.g., alanine, serine, threonine, preferably alanine.
- Cysteine residues that can substituted include, but are not limited to, C266, C309, C335 and C336. Making such substitutions through engineering of a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide fragment is well within the routine expertise of one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptides are used in the methods of the invention to inhibit apoptotic death of oligodendrocytes and decrease demyelination of neurons.
- the neuron is a CNS neuron.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention described herein may be cyclic. Cyclization of the soluble NgRl polypeptides reduces the conformational freedom of linear peptides and results in a more structurally constrained molecule. Many methods of peptide cyclization are known in the art, for example, "backbone
- soluble NgRl peptides of the present invention include modifications on the N- and C- terminus of the peptide to form a cyclic NgRl polypeptide. Such modifications include, but are not limited, to cysteine residues, acetylated cysteine residues cystein residues with a NH 2 moiety and biotin.
- sequence identity between two polypeptides is determined by comparing the amino acid sequence of one polypeptide to the sequence of a second polypeptide.
- sequence identity can be determined using methods and computer programs/software known in the art such as, but not limited to, the BESTFIT program (Wisconsin Sequence Analysis Package, Version 8 for Unix, Genetics Computer Group, University Research Park, 575 Science Drive, Madison, WI 53711).
- BESTFIT uses the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman, Advances in Applied Mathematics 2:482-489 (1981), to find the best segment of homology between two sequences.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention may include any combination of two or more soluble NgRl polypeptides.
- NgRl antagonists for use in the methods of the present invention also include NgRl -specific antibodies or antigen-binding fragments, variants, or derivatives.
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds specifically to at least one epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above, i.e., binds to such an epitope more readily than it would bind to an unrelated, or random epitope; binds preferentially to at least one epitope of or fragment or variant described above, i.e., binds to such an epitope more readily than it would bind to a related, similar, homologous, or analogous epitope; competitively inhibits binding of a reference antibody which itself binds specifically or preferentially to a certain epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above; or binds to at least one epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above with an affinity characterized by a dissociation constant K D of less than about 5 x 10 "2 M, about 10 '2 M 5 about 5 x 10 "3 M, about 10 "3 M, about
- the antibody or fragment thereof preferentially binds to a human NgRl polypeptide or fragment thereof, relative to a murine polypeptide or fragment thereof.
- the term “about” allows for the degree of variation inherent in the methods utilized for measuring antibody affinity. For example, depending on the level of precision of the instrumentation used, standard error based on the number of samples measured, and rounding error, the term “about 10 "2 M” might include, for example, from 0.05 M to 0.005 M.
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an off rate (k(off» of less than or equal to 5 X 10 "2 sec “1 , 10 "2 sec '1 , 5 X 10 "3 sec “1 or lO '3 sec " .
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an off rate (k(off)) of less than or equal to 5 X 10 "4 sec “1 , 10 "4 sec “1 , 5 X 10 "5 sec “1 , or 10 "5 sec “1 5 X 10 "6 sec “1 , 10 “6 sec “1 , 5 X 10 "7 sec “1 or lO '7 sec “1 .
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) of greater than or equal to 10 3 M "1 sec “1 , 5 X 10 3 M “1 sec “1 , 10 4 M “1 sec “1 . or 5 X 10 4 M “1 sec “1 .
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) of greater than or equal to 10 3 M "1 sec “1 , 5 X 10 3 M “1 sec “1 , 10 4 M “1 sec “1 . or 5 X 10 4 M “1 sec “1 .
- an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) of greater than
- NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) greater than or equal to 10 5 M “1 sec “1 , 5 X 10 s M “1 sec “1 , 10 6 M “1 sec “1 , or 5 X 10 6 M “1 sec “1 or 10 7 M “1 sec “1 .
- a NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the invention is ari antibody molecule, or immunospecific fragment thereof.
- a "fragment thereof in reference to an antibody refers to an immunospecific fragment, i.e., an antigen-specific fragment.
- an antibody of the invention is a bispecific binding molecule, binding polypeptide, or antibody, e.g., a bispecific antibody, minibody, domain deleted antibody, or fusion protein having binding specificity for more than one epitope, e.g., more than one antigen or more than one epitope on the same antigen.
- a bispecific antibody has at least one binding domain specific for at least one epitope on NgRl.
- a bispecific antibody may be a tetravalent antibody that has two target binding domains specific for an epitope of NgRl and two target binding domains specific for a second target.
- a tetravalent bispecific antibody may be bivalent for each specificity.
- an antagonist antibody, or immunospecific fragment thereof in which at least a fraction of one or more of the constant region domains has been deleted or otherwise altered so as to provide desired biochemical characteristics such as reduced effector functions, the ability to non- covalently dimerize, increased ability to localize at the site of a tumor, reduced serum half-life, or increased serum half-life when compared with a whole, unaltered antibody of approximately the same immunogenicity.
- certain antibodies for use in the treatment methods described herein are domain deleted antibodies which comprise a polypeptide chain similar to an immunoglobulin heavy chain, but which lack at least a portion of one or more heavy chain domains.
- the Fc portion may be mutated to decrease effector function using techniques known in the art.
- the deletion or inactivation (through point mutations or other means) of a constant region domain may reduce Fc receptor binding of the circulating modified antibody thereby increasing tumor localization.
- constant region modifications consistent with the instant invention moderate complement binding and thus reduce the serum half life and nonspecific association of a conjugated cytotoxin.
- Yet other modifications of the constant region may be used to modify disulfide linkages or oligosaccharide moieties that allow for enhanced localization due
- Modified forms of antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be made from whole precursor or parent antibodies using techniques known in the art. Exemplary techniques are discussed in more detail herein.
- both the variable and constant regions of NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein are fully human.
- Fully human antibodies can be made using techniques that are known in the art and as described herein.
- Fully human, antibodies against a specific antigen can be prepared by administering the antigen to a transgenic animal which has been modified to produce such antibodies in response to antigenic challenge, but whose endogenous loci have been disabled.
- Exemplary techniques that can be used to make such antibodies are described in US patents: 6,150,584; 6,458,592; 6,420,140. Other techniques are known in the art.
- NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein can be made or manufactured using techniques that are known in the art. hi certain embodiments, antibody molecules or fragments thereof are "recombinantly produced," i.e., are produced using recombinant DNA technology. Exemplary techniques for making antibody molecules or fragments thereof are discussed in more detail elsewhere herein.
- NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein include derivatives that are modified, e.g., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibody such that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody from specifically binding to its cognate epitope.
- the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have been modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic
- the derivative may contain one or more non- classical amino acids.
- an NgRl antagonist antibody or immunospecific fragment thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein will not elicit a deleterious immune response in the animal to be treated, e.g., in a human.
- antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein may be modified to reduce their immunogenicity using art-recognized techniques.
- antibodies can be humanized, primatized, deimmunized, or chimeric antibodies can be made. These types of antibodies are derived from a non-human antibody, typically a murine or primate antibody, that retains or substantially retains the antigen-binding properties of the parent antibody, but which is less immunogenic in humans.
- CDRs complementarity determining regions
- De-immunization can also be used to decrease the immunogenicity of an antibody.
- the term "de-immunization” includes alteration of an antibody to modify T cell epitopes (see, e.g., WO9852976A1, WO0034317A2).
- V H and V L sequences from the starting antibody are analyzed and a human T cell epitope "map" from each V region showing the location of epitopes in relation to complementarity-determining regions (CDRs) and other key residues within the sequence.
- Individual T cell epitopes from the T cell epitope map are analyzed in order to identify alternative amino acid substitutions with a low risk of altering activity of the final antibody.
- a range of alternative V H and V L sequences are designed comprising combinations of amino acid substitutions and these sequences are subsequently incorporated into a range of binding polypeptides, e.g., NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein, which are then tested for function. Typically, between 12 and 24 variant antibodies are generated and tested.
- Complete heavy and light chain genes comprising
- V and human C regions are then cloned into expression vectors and the subsequent plasmids introduced into cell lines for the production of whole antibody.
- the antibodies are then compared in appropriate biochemical and biological assays, and the optimal variant is identified.
- NgRl antagonist antibodies or fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention may be generated by any suitable method known in the art.
- Polyclonal antibodies can be produced by various procedures well known in the art.
- a immunospecific fragment can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen.
- adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.
- Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof.
- monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. (1988); Hammerling et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-CeIl Hybridomas Elsevier, N.Y., 563-681 (1981) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties).
- the term "monoclonal antibody” as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology.
- the term “monoclonal antibody” refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced. Thus, the term “monoclonal antibody” is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology.
- Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma and recombinant and phage display technology.
- antibodies are raised in mammals by multiple subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections of the relevant antigen (e.g., purified NgRl antigens or cells or cellular extracts comprising such antigens) and an adjuvant.
- the relevant antigen e.g., purified NgRl antigens or cells or cellular extracts comprising such antigens
- an adjuvant e.g., an adjuvant
- the lymphocytes are obtained from the spleen.
- lymphocytes from a mammal which has been injected with antigen are fused with an immortal tumor cell line (e.g. a myeloma cell line), thus, producing hybrid cells or "hybridomas" which are both immortal and capable of producing the genetically coded antibody of the B cell.
- an immortal tumor cell line e.g. a myeloma cell line
- hybrid cells or "hybridomas" which are both immortal and capable of producing the genetically coded antibody of the B cell.
- the resulting hybrids are segregated into single genetic strains by selection, dilution, and regrowth with each individual strain comprising specific genes for the formation of a single antibody.
- Hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells.
- suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells.
- reagents, cell lines and media for the formation, selection and growth of hybridomas are commercially available from a number of sources and standardized protocols are well established.
- culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are growing is assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies against the desired antigen.
- the binding specificity of the monoclonal antibodies produced by hybridoma cells is determined by in vitro assays such as immunoprecipitation, radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA).
- in vitro assays such as immunoprecipitation, radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA).
- RIA radioimmunoassay
- ELISA enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay
- the monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones may be separated from culture medium, ascites fluid or serum by conventional purification procedures such as, for example, protein- A, hydroxyl apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis or affinity chromatography.
- Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab')2 fragments may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments). F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the C H I domain of the heavy chain.
- DNA encoding antibodies or antibody fragments may also be derived from antibody phage libraries.
- phage can be utilized to display antigen-binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine).
- Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead.
- Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein.
- Exemplary methods are set forth, for example, in EP 368 684 Bl; U.S. patent. 5,969,108, Hoogenboom, H.R. and Chames, Immunol. Today 21:371 (2000); Nagy et al. Nat. Med. 5:801 (2002); Huie et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 95:2682 (2001); Lui et al., J. MoI. Biol.
- Ribosomal display can be used to replace bacteriophage as the display platform (see, e.g., Hanes et al., Nat. Biotechnol. i ⁇ :1287 (2000); Wilson et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 98:3750 (2001); or Irving et al., J.
- cell surface libraries can be screened for antibodies (Boder et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Set USA 97:10701 (2000); Daugherty et al., J. Immunol. Methods 243:211 (2000)).
- Such procedures provide alternatives to traditional hybridoma techniques for the isolation and subsequent cloning of monoclonal antibodies.
- phage display methods functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them.
- DNA sequences encoding V H and V L regions are amplified from animal cDNA libraries (e.g., human or murine cDNA libraries of lymphoid tissues) or synthetic cDNA libraries.
- the DNA encoding the V H and V L regions are joined together by an scFv linker by PCR and cloned into a phagemid vector (e.g., p CANTAB 6 or pComb 3 HSS).
- the vector is electroporated in E. coli and the E. coli is infected with helper phage.
- Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 and the V H or V L regions are usually recombinantly fused to either the phage gene in or gene VIII.
- Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds to an antigen of interest i.e., a NgRl polypeptide or a
- - 29 - fragment thereof can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead.
- phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies include those disclosed in Brinkman et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 182:41-50 (1995); Ames et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177-186 (1995); Kettleborough et al, Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 (1994); Persic et ah, Gene 187:9-1% (1997); Burton et al, Advances in Immunology 57:191-280 (1994); PCT Application No.
- the antibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used to generate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any other desired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host, including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, and bacteria.
- Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 fragments can also be employed using methods known in the art such as those disclosed in PCT publication WO 92/22324; Mullinax et al, BioTechniques i2(15):864-869 (1992); and Sawai et ah, AJRI 34:26-34 (1995); and Better et ah, Science 240:1041-1043 (1988) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties).
- a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
- Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. See, e.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et ah, BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Gillies et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 125:191-202 (1989); U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and framework
- framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding.
- framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Pat. No.
- Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(o>.805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al, PNAS 91:969-913 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,332).
- Human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients.
- Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes.
- the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells.
- the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes.
- the mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered non-functional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination, in particular, homozygous deletion of the JH region prevents endogenous antibody production.
- the modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice.
- the chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygous offspring that express human antibodies.
- the transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a desired target polypeptide.
- Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology.
- the human immunogen e.g., all or a portion of a desired target polypeptide.
- Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as "guided selection.”
- a selected non-human monoclonal antibody e.g. , a mouse antibody
- DNA encoding desired monoclonal antibodies may be readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies).
- the isolated and subcloned hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA.
- the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulins.
- the isolated DNA (which may be synthetic as described herein) may be used to clone constant and variable region sequences for the manufacture antibodies as described in Newman et at., U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,570, filed January 25, 1995, which is incorporated by reference herein. Essentially, this entails extraction of PJMA from the selected cells, conversion to cDNA, and amplification by PCR using Ig specific primers. Suitable primers for this purpose are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,570. As will be discussed in more detail below, transformed cells expressing the desired antibody may be grown up in relatively large quantities to provide clinical and commercial supplies of the immunoglobulin.
- the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/or light chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequences of the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that are well know in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequences of other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regions of sequence hypervariability.
- CDRs complementarity determining regions
- one or more of the CDRs maybe inserted within framework regions, e.g., into human framework regions to humanize a non-human antibody.
- the framework regions may be naturally occurring or consensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions (see, e.g., Chothia et al, J. MoI. Biol.
- the polynucleotide generated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodes an antibody that specifically binds to at least one epitope of a desired polypeptide, e.g., NgRl .
- a desired polypeptide e.g., NgRl
- one or more amino acid substitutions may be made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acid substitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen. Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutions or deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibody molecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds.
- a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies.
- NgRl antagonist antibodies may also be human or substantially human antibodies generated in transgenic animals (e.g., mice) that are incapable of endogenous immunoglobulin
- lymphocytes can be selected by micromanipulation and the variable genes isolated.
- peripheral blood mononuclear cells can be isolated from an immunized mammal and cultured for about 7 days in vitro. The cultures can be screened for specific IgGs that meet the screening criteria. Cells from positive wells can be isolated. Individual Ig-producing B cells can be isolated by FACS or by identifying them in a complement-mediated hemolytic plaque assay. Ig-producing B cells can be micromanipulated into a tube and the V H and V L genes can be amplified using, e.g., RT-PCR. The V H and V L genes can be cloned into an antibody expression vector and transfected into cells (e.g., eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells) for expression.
- cells e.g., eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells
- antibody-producing cell lines may be selected and cultured using techniques well known to the skilled artisan. Such techniques are described in a variety of laboratory manuals and primary publications. In this respect, techniques suitable for use in the invention as described below are described in Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et ah, Eds., Green Publishing Associates and Wiley-Interscience, John Wiley and Sons, New York (1991) which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety, including supplements. [0130] Antibodies for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be produced by any method known in the art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques as described herein.
- RNA may be isolated from the original hybridoma cells or from other transformed cells by standard techniques, such as guanidinium isothiocyanate extraction and precipitation followed by centrifugation or chromatography. Where desirable, mRNA may be isolated from total RNA by standard techniques such as chromatography on oligo dT cellulose. Suitable techniques are familiar in the art.
- cDNAs that encode the light and the heavy chains of the antibody may be made, either simultaneously or separately, using reverse transcriptase and DNA polymerase in accordance with well known methods.
- PCR may be initiated by consensus constant region primers or by more specific primers based on the published heavy and light chain DNA and amino acid sequences.
- PCR also may be used to isolate DNA clones encoding the antibody light and heavy chains. In this case the libraries may be screened by consensus primers or larger homologous probes, such as mouse constant region probes.
- DNA typically plasmid DNA
- DNA may be isolated from the cells using techniques known in the art, restriction mapped and sequenced in accordance with standard, well known techniques set forth in detail, e.g., in the foregoing references relating to recombinant DNA techniques.
- the DNA may be synthetic according to the present invention at any point during the isolation process or subsequent analysis.
- an antibody, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof e.g. , a heavy or light chain of an antibody which is an NgRl antagonist
- an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody Once a polynucleotide encoding an antibody molecule or a heavy or light chain of an antibody, or portion thereof (preferably containing the heavy or light chain variable domain), of the invention has been obtained, the vector for the production of the antibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing a protein by expressing a polynucleotide containing an antibody encoding nucleotide sequence are described herein.
- Such vectors may include the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibody molecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO 89/01036; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of the antibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entire heavy or light chain.
- the expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce an antibody for use in the methods described herein.
- the invention includes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, operably linked to a heterologous promoter.
- vectors encoding both the heavy and light chains may be co- expressed in the host cell for expression of the entire immunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below.
- host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express antibody molecules for use in the methods described herein.
- Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ.
- These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B.
- subtilis transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichi ⁇ ) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS, CHO, BLK, 293, 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mamm
- bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, and more preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of a recombinant antibody molecule.
- mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from CHO.
- cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies (Foecking ei al, Gene 45:101 (1986); Cockett et al, Bio/Technology 8:2 (1990)).
- a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody molecule being expressed.
- vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable.
- Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al, EMBO J. 2:1791 (1983)), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lacZ coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res.
- pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST).
- GST glutathione S-transferase
- fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to a matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
- the pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.
- Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is typically used as a vector to express foreign genes.
- the virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
- the antibody coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter).
- a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized.
- the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence.
- This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome ⁇ e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, Proc.
- Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety
- a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein.
- Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed.
- eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used.
- Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERY, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell line such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.
- cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule may be engineered.
- host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.
- appropriate expression control elements e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.
- engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media.
- the selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines.
- This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule.
- a number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et ah, Cell JJ.-223 (1977)), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, Proa Natl. Acad. ScL USA 48:202 (1992)), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et ah, Cell 22:% ⁇ 1 1980) genes can be employed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt-cells, respectively.
- antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et ah, Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 77:357 (1980); O'Hare et ah, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1527
- the host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of the invention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide.
- the two vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides.
- a single vector may be used which encodes both heavy and light chain polypeptides.
- the light chain is advantageously placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (Proudfoot, Nature 322:52 (1986); Kohler, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set. USA 77:2197 (1980)).
- the coding sequences for the heavy and light chains may comprise cDNA or genomic DNA.
- an antibody molecule of the invention may be purified by any method known in the art for purification of an immunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g. , ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.
- chromatography e.g. , ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography
- centrifugation e.g., centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.
- a binding molecule or antigen binding molecule for use in the methods of the invention comprises a synthetic constant region wherein one or more domains are partially or entirely deleted ("domain-deleted antibodies").
- compatible modified antibodies will comprise domain deleted constructs or variants wherein the entire C H 2 domain has been removed ( ⁇ C H 2 constructs).
- ⁇ C H 2 constructs For other embodiments a short connecting peptide may be substituted for the deleted domain to provide flexibility and freedom of movement for the variable region.
- modified antibodies for use in the methods disclosed herein are minibodies.
- Minibodies can be made using methods described in the art (see, e.g., US patent 5,837,821 or WO 94/09817A1).
- modified antibodies for use in the methods disclosed herein are C H 2 domain deleted antibodies which are known in the art.
- Domain deleted constructs can be derived using a vector (e.g., from Bio gen IDEC Incorporated) encoding an IgGi human constant domain (see, e.g., WO 02/060955A2 and WO02/096948A2).
- This exemplary vector was engineered to delete the C H 2 domain and provide a synthetic vector expressing a domain deleted IgGi constant region.
- a NgRl antagonist antibody or fragment thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein comprises an immunoglobulin heavy chain having deletion or substitution of a few or even a single amino acid as long as it permits association between the monomeric subunits.
- the mutation of a single amino acid in selected areas of the C H 2 domain may be enough to substantially reduce Fc binding and thereby increase tumor localization.
- Such partial deletions of the constant regions may improve selected characteristics of the antibody (serum half-life) while leaving other desirable functions associated with the subject constant region domain intact.
- the constant regions of the disclosed antibodies may be synthetic through the mutation or substitution of one or more amino acids that enhances the profile of the resulting construct. In this respect it may be possible to disrupt the activity provided by a conserved binding site (e.g. Fc binding) while
- inventions comprise the addition of one or more amino acids to the constant region to enhance desirable characteristics such as effector function or provide for more cytotoxin or carbohydrate attachment. In such embodiments it may be desirable to insert or replicate specific sequences derived from selected constant region domains.
- the present invention also provides the use of antibodies that comprise, consist essentially of, or consist of, variants (including derivatives) of antibody molecules (e.g., the VH regions and/or V L regions) described herein, which antibodies or fragments thereof immunospecifically bind to a polypeptide.
- Standard techniques known to those of skill in the art can be used to introduce mutations in the nucleotide sequence encoding a binding molecule, including, but not limited to, site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis which result in amino acid substitutions.
- the variants encode less than 50 amino acid substitutions, less than 40 amino acid substitutions, less than 30 amino acid substitutions, less than 25 amino acid substitutions, less than 20 amino acid substitutions, less than 15 amino acid substitutions, less than 10 amino acid substitutions, less than 5 amino acid substitutions, less than 4 amino acid substitutions, less than 3 amino acid substitutions, or less than 2 amino acid substitutions relative to the reference V H region, V H CDRI, V H CDR2, V H CDR3, V L region, V L CDR1, V L CDR2, or V L CDR3.
- a "conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a side chain with a similar charge.
- Families of amino acid residues having side chains with similar charges have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine).
- mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of the coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants
- mutations only in framework regions or only in CDR regions of an antibody molecule. Introduced mutations may be silent or neutral missense mutations, i.e., have no, or little, effect on an antibody's ability to bind antigen. These types of mutations may be useful to optimize codon usage, or improve a hybridoma's antibody production. Alternatively, non-neutral missense mutations may alter an antibody's
- the encoded protein may routinely be expressed and the functional and/or biological activity of the encoded protein can be determined using techniques described herein or by routinely modifying techniques known in the art.
- NgRl polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein may further be recombinantly fused to a heterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemically conjugated (including covalent and non-covalent conjugations) to polypeptides or other compositions.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to molecules useful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such as heterologous polypeptides, drugs, radionuclides, or toxins. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Patent No. 5,314,995; and EP 396,387.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein include derivatives that are modified, i.e., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule such that covalent attachment does not prevent the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, or antibody from inhibiting the biological function of NgRl.
- the NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies of the present invention may be modified e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non- classical amino acids.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies may be modified by natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the antagonist polypeptide or antibody, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini, or on moieties such as carbohydrates. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody may contain many types of modifications.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods.
- Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, .
- the heterologous polypeptide to which the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is fused is useful for function or is useful to target the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody.
- NgRl antagonist fusion proteins, aptamers and antibodies can be used to accomplish various objectives, e.g., increased serum half-life, improved bioavailability, in vivo targeting to a specific organ or tissue type, improved recombinant expression efficiency, improved host cell secretion, ease of purification, and higher avidity.
- the heterologous moiety can be inert or biologically active. Also,
- a chosen heterologous moiety can be preformed and chemically conjugated to the antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody.
- a chosen heterologous moiety will function similarly, whether fused or conjugated to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Therefore, in the following discussion of heterologous amino acid sequences, unless otherwise noted, it is to be understood that the heterologous sequence can be joined to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody in the form of a fusion protein or as a chemical conjugate.
- Pharmacologically active polypeptides such as NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies often exhibit rapid in vivo clearance, necessitating large doses to achieve therapeutically effective concentrations in the body.
- polypeptides smaller than about 60 kDa potentially undergo glomerular filtration, which sometimes leads to nephrotoxicity.
- Fusion or conjugation of relatively small polypeptides such as NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies can be employed to reduce or avoid the risk of such nephrotoxicity.
- Various heterologous amino acid sequences i.e., polypeptide moieties or "carriers," for increasing the in vivo stability, i.e., serum half-life, of therapeutic polypeptides are known.
- HSA human serum albumin
- HSA can be used to form an NgRl antagonist fusion polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or polypeptide/antibody conjugate that displays pharmacological activity by virtue of the moiety while displaying significantly increased in vivo stability, e.g., 10- fold to 100-fold higher.
- the C-terminus of the HSA can be fused to the N-terminus of the soluble moiety.
- HSA is a naturally secreted protein
- the HSA signal sequence can be exploited to obtain secretion of the soluble fusion protein into the cell culture medium when the fusion protein is produced in a eukaryotic, e.g., mammalian, expression system.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, antibodies and antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention further comprise a
- Targeting moieties include a protein or a peptide which directs localization to a certain part of the body, for example, to the brain or compartments therein.
- NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention are attached or fused to a brain targeting moiety.
- the brain targeting moieties are attached covalently (e.g., direct, translational fusion, or by chemical linkage either directly or through a spacer molecule, which can be optionally cleavable) or non-covalently attached (e.g., through reversible interactions such as avidin, biotin, protein A 5 IgG, etc.).
- the NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers," antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention thereof are attached to one more brain targeting moieties.
- the brain targeting moiety is attached to a plurality of NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers b antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention.
- a brain targeting moiety associated with an NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof enhances brain delivery of such an NgRl antagonist polypeptide, antibody or antibody fragment thereof.
- a number of polypeptides have been described which, when fused to a protein or therapeutic agent, delivers the protein or therapeutic agent through the blood brain barrier (BBB).
- BBB blood brain barrier
- Non-limiting examples include the single domain antibody FC5 (Abulrob et al. (2005) J. Neurochem. 95, 1201-1214); mAB 83- 14, a monoclonal antibody to the human insulin receptor (Pardridge et al. (1995) Pharmacol. Res.
- Enhanced brain delivery of an NgRl composition is determined by a number of means well established in the art. For example, administering to an animal a radioactively labelled NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof linked to a brain targeting moiety; determining brain localization; and comparing localization with an equivalent radioactively labelled NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof that is not associated with a brain targeting moiety. Other means of determining enhanced targeting are described in the above references.
- the signal sequence is a polynucleotide that encodes an amino acid sequence that initiates transport of a protein across the membrane of the endoplasmic reticulum.
- antibody light chain signal sequences e.g., antibody 14.18 (Gillies et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 125:191-202 (1989)), antibody heavy chain signal sequences, e.g., the MOPC141 antibody heavy chain signal sequence (Sakano et al., Nature 286:5114 (1980)).
- antibody heavy chain signal sequences e.g., the MOPC141 antibody heavy chain signal sequence (Sakano et al., Nature 286:5114 (1980)).
- other signal sequences can be used. See, e.g., Watson, Nucl. Acids Res. 72:5145 (1984).
- the signal peptide is usually cleaved in the lumen of the endoplasmic reticulum by signal peptidases.
- the DNA sequence may encode a proteolytic cleavage site between the secretion cassette and the soluble NgRl moiety.
- a proteolytic cleavage site may provide, e.g., for the proteolytic cleavage of the encoded fusion protein, thus separating the Fc domain from the target protein.
- Useful proteolytic cleavage sites include amino acid sequences recognized by proteolytic enzymes such as trypsin, plasmin, thrombin, factor Xa, or enterokinase K.
- the secretion cassette can be incorporated into a replicable expression vector.
- Useful vectors include linear nucleic acids, plasmids, phagemids, cosmids and the like.
- An exemplary expression vector is pdC, in which the transcription of the immunofusin DNA is placed under the control of the enhancer and promoter of the human cytomegalovirus. See, e.g., Lo et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1088:112 (1991); and Lo et al., Protein Engineering ⁇ :495-500 (1998).
- An appropriate host cell can be transformed or transfected with a DNA that encodes a soluble polypeptide and used for the expression and secretion of the soluble NgRl polypeptide.
- Host cells that are typically used include immortal hybridoma cells, myeloma cells, 293 cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, HeLa cells, and COS cells.
- a soluble NgRl polypeptide is fused to a hinge and Fc region, i.e., the C-terminal portion of an Ig heavy chain constant region.
- Fc region i.e., the C-terminal portion of an Ig heavy chain constant region.
- Potential advantages of an NgRl-Fc fusion include solubility, in vivo stability, and multivalency, e.g., dimerization.
- the Fc region used can be an IgA, IgD, or IgG Fc region (hinge- C H 2- C H 3). Alternatively, it can be an IgE or IgM Fc region (hinge- C H 2- C H 3-C H 4).
- An IgG Fc region is generally used, e.g., an IgGi Fc region or IgG 4 Fc region.
- a sequence beginning in the hinge region just upstream of the papain cleavage site which defines IgG Fc chemically i.e. residue 216, taking the first residue of heavy chain constant region to be 114 according to the Kabat system
- analogous sites of other immunoglobulins is used in the fusion.
- the precise site at which the fusion is made is not critical; particular sites are well known and may be selected in order to optimize the biological activity, secretion, or binding characteristics of the molecule. Materials and methods for constructing and expressing DNA encoding Fc fusions are known in
- NgRl fusion protein such as those described in Capon et al, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,428,130 and 5,565,335.
- the IgG 1 Fc region is most often used.
- the Fc region of the other subclasses of immunoglobulin gamma (gamma-2, gamma-3 and gamma-4) can be used in the secretion cassette.
- the IgG 1 Fc region of immunoglobulin gamma- 1 is generally used in the secretion cassette and includes at least part of the hinge region, the C H 2 region, and the C H 3 region.
- the Fc region of immunoglobulin gamma- 1 is a C ⁇ 2-deleted- Fc, which includes part of the hinge region and the C H 3 region, but not the C H 2 region.
- NgRl-Fc fusion proteins can be constructed in several different configurations. In one configuration the C-terminus of the soluble NgRl moiety is fused directly to the N- terminus of the Fc hinge moiety. In a slightly different configuration, a short polypeptide, e.g. , 2-10 amino acids, is incorporated into the fusion between the N-terminus of the soluble NgRl moiety and the C-terminus of the Fc moiety.
- the short polypeptide is incorporated into the fusion between the C-terminus of the NgR polypeptide moiety and the N-terminus of the Fc moiety.
- a linker provides conformational flexibility, which may improve biological activity in some circumstances. If a sufficient portion of the hinge region is retained in the Fc moiety, the NgRl-Fc fusion will dimerize, thus forming a divalent molecule.
- a homogeneous population of monomelic Fc fusions will yield monospecific, bivalent dimers.
- a mixture of two monomelic Fc fusions each having a different specificity will yield bispecific, bivalent dimers.
- cross- linkers that contain a corresponding amino-reactive group and thiol-reactive group can be used to link NgRl antagonist polypeptides to serum albumin.
- suitable linkers include amine reactive cross-linkers that insert a thiol-reactive
- - 47 - maleimide e.g., SMCC, AMAS, BMPS, MBS 3 EMCS, SMPB 5 SMPH, KMUS, and GMBS.
- Other suitable linkers insert a thiol-reactive haloacetate group, e.g., SBAP, SIA, SIAB.
- Linkers that provide a protected or non-protected thiol for reaction with sulfhydryl groups to product a reducible linkage include SPDP, SMPT, SATA, and SATP. Such reagents are commercially available (e.g., Pierce Chemicals).
- Conjugation does not have to involve the N-terminus of a soluble polypeptide or the thiol moiety on serum albumin.
- soluble NgRl -albumin fusions can be obtained using genetic engineering techniques, wherein the soluble NgRl moiety is fused to the serum albumin gene at its N-terminus, C-terminus, or both.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides can be fused to heterologous peptides to facilitate purification or identification of the soluble NgRl moiety.
- a histidine tag can be fused to a soluble NgRl polypeptide to facilitate purification using commercially available chromatography media.
- a soluble NgRl fusion construct is used to enhance the production of a soluble NgRl moiety in bacteria.
- a bacterial protein normally expressed and/or secreted at a high level is employed as the N-terminal fusion partner of a soluble polypeptide. See, e.g., Smith et at, Gene 67:31 (1988); Hopp et at, Biotechnology 6:1204 (1988); LaVaIHe et at, Biotechnology 7/:187 (1993).
- a soluble NgRl moiety By fusing a soluble NgRl moiety at the amino and carboxy termini of a suitable fusion partner, bivalent or tetravalent forms of a soluble NgRl polypeptide can be obtained.
- a soluble NgRl moiety can be fused to the amino and carboxy termini of an Ig moiety to produce a bivalent monomeric polypeptide containing two soluble NgRl moieties.
- a tetravalent form of a soluble NgRl protein is obtained.
- Such multivalent forms can be used to achieve increased binding affinity for the target.
- Multivalent forms of soluble NgRl also can be obtained by placing soluble NgRl moieties in tandem to form concatamers, which can be employed alone or fused to a fusion partner such as Ig or HSA.
- Some embodiments of the invention involve a soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl aptamer or NgRl antibody wherein one or more polymers are conjugated (covalently linked) to the NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody for use in the methods of the present invention.
- polymers suitable for such conjugation include polypeptides (discussed above), aptamers, sugar polymers and polyalkylene glycol chains.
- a polypeptides discussed above
- the class of polymer generally used for conjugation to a NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is a polyalkylene glycol.
- Polyethylene glycol (PEG) is most frequently used.
- PEG moieties, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 PEG polymers, can be conjugated to each NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody to increase serum half life, as compared to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody alone.
- PEG moieties are non-antigenic and essentially biologically inert.
- PEG moieties used in the practice of the invention may be branched or unbranched.
- the number of PEG moieties attached to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody and the molecular weight of the individual PEG chains can vary. In general, the higher the molecular weight of the polymer, the fewer polymer chains attached to the polypeptide. Usually, the total polymer mass attached to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is from. 20 kDa to 40 kDa. Thus, if one polymer chain is attached, the molecular weight of the chain is generally 20-40 kDa. If two chains are attached, the molecular weight of each chain is generally 10-20 kDa. If three chains are attached, the molecular weight is generally 7-14 kDa.
- the polymer e.g., PEG
- the polymer can be linked to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody through any suitable, exposed reactive group on the polypeptide.
- the exposed reactive group(s) can be, e.g., an N-terminal amino group or the epsilon amino group of an internal lysine residue, or both.
- An activated polymer can react and covalently link at any free amino group on the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody.
- Free carboxylic groups suitably activated carbonyl groups, hydroxyl, guanidyl, imidazole, oxidized carbohydrate moieties and mercapto groups of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody (if available) also can be used as reactive groups for polymer attachment.
- a conjugation reaction from about 1.0 to about 10 moles of activated polymer per mole of polypeptide, depending on polypeptide concentration, is typically employed. Usually, the ratio chosen represents a balance between maximizing the reaction while minimizing side reactions (often non-specific) that can impair the desired pharmacological activity of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody.
- the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is retained, and most preferably nearly 100% is retained.
- the polymer can be conjugated to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody using conventional chemistry.
- a polyalkylene glycol moiety can be coupled to a lysine epsilon amino group of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide or antibody.
- Linkage to the lysine side chain can be performed with an N-hydroxylsuccinimide (NHS) active ester such as PEG succinimidyl succinate (SS-PEG) and succinimidyl propionate (SPA- PEG).
- Suitable polyalkylene glycol moieties include, e.g., carboxymethyl-NHS and norleucine-NHS, SC. These reagents are commercially available.
- Additional amine-reactive PEG linkers can be substituted for the succinimidyl moiety. These include, e.g., isothiocyanates, nitrophenylcarbonates (PNP), epoxides, benzotriazole carbonates, SC-PEG, tresylate, aldehyde, epoxide, carbonylimidazole and PNP carbonate. Conditions are usually optimized to maximize the selectivity and extent of reaction. Such optimization of reaction conditions is within ordinary skill in the art.
- PEGylation can be carried out by any of the PEGylation reactions known in the art. See, e.g., Focus on Growth Factors 3:4-10 (1992), and European patent applications EP 0 154 316 and EP 0 401 384. PEGylation may be carried out using an acylation reaction or an alkylation reaction with a reactive polyethylene glycol molecule (or an analogous reactive water-soluble polymer).
- PEGylation by acylation generally involves reacting an active ester derivative of polyethylene glycol. Any reactive PEG molecule can be employed in the PEGylation. PEG esterif ⁇ ed to N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) is a frequently used activated PEG ester.
- acylation includes without limitation the following types of linkages between the therapeutic protein and a water-soluble polymer such as PEG: amide, carbamate, urethane, and the like. See, e.g., Bioconjugate Chem_. 5:133-140, 1994. Reaction parameters are generally selected to avoid temperature, solvent, and pH conditions that would damage or inactivate the soluble polypeptide.
- the connecting linkage is an amide and typically at least 95% of the resulting product is mono-, di- or tri-PEGylated.
- some species with higher degrees of PEGylation may be formed in amounts depending on the specific reaction conditions used.
- purified PEGylated species are separated from the mixture, particularly unreacted species, by conventional purification methods, including, e.g., dialysis, salting-out, ultrafiltration, ion-exchange chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, hydrophobic exchange chromatography, and electrophoresis.
- PEGylation by alkylation generally involves reacting a terminal aldehyde derivative of PEG with NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody in the presence of a reducing agent
- reaction conditions to favor PEGylation substantially only at the- N-terminal amino group of NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody, i.e. a mono-PEGylated protein.
- the PEG groups are typically attached to the protein via a - C H 2-NH- group. With particular reference to the - C H 2- group, this type of linkage is known as an "alkyl" linkage.
- the polymer molecules used in both the acylation and alkylation approaches are selected from among water-soluble polymers.
- the polymer selected is typically modified to have a single reactive group, such as an active ester for acylation or an aldehyde for alkylation, so that the degree of polymerization may be controlled as provided for in the present methods.
- An exemplary reactive PEG aldehyde is polyethylene glycol propionaldehyde, which is water stable, or mono Cl-ClO alkoxy or aryloxy derivatives thereof (see, e.g., Harris et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,714).
- the polymer may be branched or unbranched.
- the polymer(s) selected typically have a single reactive ester group.
- the polymer(s) selected typically have a single reactive aldehyde group.
- the water- soluble polymer will not be selected from naturally occurring glycosyl residues, because these are usually made more conveniently by mammalian recombinant expression systems.
- Methods for preparing a PEGylated soluble NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody generally includes the steps of (a) reacting a NgRl antagonist polypeptide or antibody with polyethylene glycol (such as a reactive ester or aldehyde derivative of PEG) under conditions whereby the molecule becomes attached to one or more PEG groups, and (b) obtaining the reaction product(s).
- polyethylene glycol such as a reactive ester or aldehyde derivative of PEG
- the optimal reaction conditions for the acylation reactions will be determined case-by-case based on known parameters and the desired result. For example, a larger ratio of PEG to protein generally leads to a greater the percentage of poly-PEGylated product.
- Reductive alkylation to produce a substantially homogeneous population of mono- polymer/soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl aptamer or NgRl antibody generally includes the steps of: (a) reacting a soluble NgRl protein or polypeptide with a reactive PEG molecule under reductive alkylation conditions, at a pH suitable to permit selective modification of the N-terminal amino group of the polypeptide or antibody; and (b) obtaining the reaction produces).
- the reductive alkylation reaction conditions are those that permit the selective attachment of the water-soluble polymer moiety to the N- terminus of the polypeptide or antibody.
- Such reaction conditions generally provide for pKa differences between the lysine side chain amino groups and the N-terminal amino group.
- the pH is generally in the range of 3-9, typically 3-6.
- Soluble NgRl polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies can include a tag, e.g., a moiety that can be subsequently released by proteolysis.
- the lysine moiety can be selectively modified by first reacting a His-tag modified with a low-molecular-weight linker such as Traut's reagent (Pierce) which will react with both the lysine and N-terminus, and then releasing the His tag.
- the polypeptide will then contain a free SH group that can be selectively modified with a PEG containing a thiol-reactive head group such as a maleimide group, a vinylsulfone group, a haloacetate group, or a free or protected SH.
- Traut's reagent can be replaced with any linker that will set up a specific site for PEG attachment.
- Traut's reagent can be replaced with SPDP, SMPT, SATA, or SATP (Pierce).
- SPDP SPDP
- SMPT SATA
- SATP SATP
- a maleimide for example SMCC, AMAS, BMPS, MBS, EMCS, SMPB, SMPH, KMUS, or GMBS
- SBAP haloacetate group
- SIAB vinylsulfone group
- the polyalkylene glycol moiety is coupled to a cysteine group of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Coupling can be effected using, e.g., a maleimide group, a vinylsulfone group, a haloacetate group, or a thiol group.
- the soluble NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is conjugated to the polyethylene-glycol moiety through a labile bond.
- the labile bond can be .cleaved in, e.g., biochemical hydrolysis, proteolysis, or sulfhydryl cleavage. For example, the bond can be cleaved under in vivo (physiological) conditions.
- the reactions may take place by any suitable method used for reacting biologically active materials with inert polymers, generally at about pH 5-8, e.g., pH 5, 6, 7, or 8, if the
- - 52 - reactive groups are on the alpha amino group at the N-terminus.
- the process involves preparing an activated polymer and thereafter reacting the protein with the activated polymer to produce the soluble protein suitable for formulation.
- Specific embodiments comprise a method of treating a demyelination or dysmyelination disorder, comprising administering an effective amount of an polynucleotide antagonist which comprises a nucleic acid molecule which specifically binds to a polynucleotide which encodes NgRl.
- the NgRl polynucleotide antagonist prevents expression of NgRl (knockdown).
- NgRl polynucleotide antagonists include, but are not limited to antisense molecules, ribozymes, siRNA, shRNA and RNAi. Typically, such binding molecules are separately administered to the animal (see, for example, O'Connor, J. Neurochem.
- RNAi refers to the expression of an RNA which interferes with the expression of the targeted mRNA. Specifically, the RNAi silences a targeted gene via interacting with the specific mRNA (e.g.NgRl) through an siRNA (short interfering RNA). The ds RNA complex is then targeted for degradation by the cell. Additional RNAi molecules include short hairpin RNA (shRNA); also short interfering hairpin.
- the shRNA molecule contains sense and antisense sequences from a target gene connected by a loop.
- the shRNA is transported from the nucleus into the cytoplasm, it is degraded along with the mRNA.
- Pol III or U6 promoters can be used to express RNAs for RNAi.
- RNAi is mediated by double stranded RNA (dsRNA) molecules that have sequence- specific homology to their "target" mRNAs (Caplen et al, Proc Natl Acad Sd USA 98:9742- 9747, 2001). Biochemical studies in Drosophila cell-free lysates indicates that the mediators of RNA-dependent gene silencing are 21-25 nucleotide "small interfering" RNA duplexes (siRNAs). Accordingly, siRNA molecules are advantageously used in the methods of the present invention.
- the siRNAs are derived from the processing of dsRNA by an RNase known as DICER (Bernstein et al, Nature 409:363-366, 2001).
- siRNA duplex products are recruited into a multi-protein siRNA complex termed RISC (RNA Induced Silencing Complex).
- RISC RNA Induced Silencing Complex
- RNAi has been used to analyze gene function and to identify essential genes in mammalian cells (Elbashir et al, Methods 25:199-213, 2002; Harborth et al, J Cell Sci 114:4557-4565, 2001), including by way of non- limiting example neurons (Krichevsky et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 99:11926-11929, 2002).
- RNAi is also being evaluated for therapeutic modalities, such as inhibiting or blocking the infection, replication and/or growth of viruses, including without limitation poliovirus (Gitlin et al, Nature 418:379-380, 2002) and HIV (Capodic ⁇ et al, J Immunol 169:5196-5201, 2002), and reducing expression of oncogenes (e.g., the bcr-abl gene; Scherr et al, Blood 70/(4): 1566-9, 2002).
- viruses including without limitation poliovirus (Gitlin et al, Nature 418:379-380, 2002) and HIV (Capodic ⁇ et al, J Immunol 169:5196-5201, 2002), and reducing expression of oncogenes (e.g., the bcr-abl gene; Scherr et al, Blood 70/(4): 1566-9, 2002).
- RNAi has been used to modulate gene expression in mammalian (mouse) and amphibian (Xenopus) embryos (respectively, Calegari et al, Proc Natl Acad Sd USA 99: 14236- 14240, 2002; and Zhou, et al, Nucleic Acids Res 30:1664-1669, 2002), and in postnatal mice (Lewis et al., Nat Genet 52:107-108, 2002), and to reduce transgene expression in adult transgenic mice (McCaffrey et al, Nature 418:3%- 39, 2002).
- RNAi molecules that mediate RNAi, including without limitation siRNA
- chemical synthesis Hohjoh, FEBS Lett 521 -.195-199, 2002
- hydrolysis of dsRNA Yang et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA PP: 9942-9947, 2002
- T7 RNA polymerase Trigger RNA polymerase
- hydrolysis of double-stranded RNA using a nuclease such as E.
- siRNA molecules may also be formed by annealing two oligonucleotides to each other, typically have the following general structure, which includes both double-stranded and single-stranded portions:
- N, X and Y are nucleotides; X hydrogen bonds to Y; ":" signifies a hydrogen bond between two bases; x is a natural integer having a value between 1 and about 100; and m and n are whole integers having, independently, values between 0 and about 100.
- N 5 X and Y are independently A, G, C and T or U.
- Non-naturally occurring bases and nucleotides can be present, particularly in the case of synthetic siRNA (i.e., the product of annealing two oligonucleotides).
- the double-stranded central section is called the "core” and has base pairs (bp) as units of measurement; the single-stranded portions are overhangs, having nucleotides (nt) as units of measurement.
- the overhangs shown are 3 ' overhangs, but molecules with 5' overhangs are also within the scope of the invention.
- JRNAi technology did not appear to be readily applicable to mammalian systems. This is because, in mammals, dsRNA activates dsRNA-activated protein kinase (PKR) resulting in an apoptotic cascade and cell death (Der et ⁇ l, Proc. N ⁇ tl. Ac ⁇ d. Sci. USA P4:3279-3283, 1997). In addition, it has long been known that dsRNA activates the interferon cascade in mammalian cells, which can also lead to altered cell physiology (Colby et ⁇ l, Annu. Rev. Microbiol. 25:333, 1971; Kleinschmidt et ⁇ l., Annu. Rev. Biochem.
- dsRNA-mediated activation of the PKR and interferon cascades requires dsRNA longer than about 30 base pairs. In contrast, dsRNA less than 30 base pairs in length has been demonstrated to cause RNAi in mammalian cells (Caplen et ⁇ l., Proc. N ⁇ tl. Ac ⁇ d. Sci. USA 98:9742-9747, 2001).
- siRNA Bernstein et ⁇ l., Nature 409:363-366, 2001; Boutla et al, Curr Biol 11: 1776-1780, 2001; Cullen, Nat Immunol. 3:597-599, 2002; Caplen et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 95:9742-9747, 2001; Hamilton et al., Science 286:950-952, 1999; Nagase et al, DNA Res.
- stem and loop of functional shRNAs varies; stem lengths can range anywhere from about 25 to about 30 nt, and loop size can range between 4 to about 25 nt without affecting silencing activity. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that these shRNAs resemble the dsRNA products of the DICER RNase and, in any event, have the same capacity for inhibiting expression of a specific gene.
- the invention provides that that siRNA or the shRNA inhibits NgRl expression. In some embodiments, the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA is at least 80%, 90%, or 95% identical to the nucleotide sequence comprising: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
- siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
- the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is complementary to the mRNA produced by the polynucleotide sequence GATGAAGAGGGCGTCC GCT (SEQ ID NO:9) or GGGCCTGGCTGCAGAAGTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) or GACTGGTGACTCAGAAGGC (SEQ ID NO: 13).
- the shRNA is expressed from a lentiviral vector.
- nucleic acid molecules with modifications can prevent their degradation by serum ribonucleases, which can increase their potency ⁇ see e.g., Eckstein et al, International Publication No. WO 92/07065; Perrault et al, Nature 344:565 (1990); Pieken et al., Science 253:314 (1991); Usman and Cedergren, Trends in Biochem. Sd. 17:334 (1992); Usman et al, International Publication No. WO 93/15187; and Rossi et al, International Publication No. WO 91/03162; Sproat, U.S. Pat. No.
- oligonucleotides are modified to enhance stability and/or enhance biological activity by modification with nuclease resistant groups, for example, 2'-amino, 2'-C-allyl, 2'-flouro, 2'-O-methyl, 2'-O-allyl, 2'-H, nucleotide base modifications (for a review see Usman and Cedergren, TIBS. 17:34 (1992); Usman et al, Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 31:163 (1994); Burgin et al, Biochemistry 35:14090 (1996)).
- nuclease resistant groups for example, 2'-amino, 2'-C-allyl, 2'-flouro, 2'-O-methyl, 2'-O-allyl, 2'-H, nucleotide base modifications (for a review see Usman and Cedergren, TIBS. 17:34 (1992); Usman et al, Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 31:163 (1994
- the invention features modified siRNA molecules, with phosphate backbone modifications comprising one or more phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, methylphosphonate, phosphotriester, morpholino, amidate carbamate, carboxymethyl, acetamidate, polyamide, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfamate, formacetal, thioformacetal, and/or alkylsilyl, substitutions.
- phosphate backbone modifications comprising one or more phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, methylphosphonate, phosphotriester, morpholino, amidate carbamate, carboxymethyl, acetamidate, polyamide, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfamate, formacetal, thioformacetal, and/or alkylsilyl, substitutions.
- siRNA molecules having chemical modifications that maintain or enhance activity are provided. Such a nucleic acid is also generally more resistant to nucleases than an unmodified nucleic acid. Accordingly, the in vitro and/or in vivo activity should not be significantly lowered. In cases in which modulation is the goal, therapeutic nucleic acid molecules delivered exogenously should optimally be stable within cells until translation of the target RNA has been modulated long enough to reduce the levels of the undesirable protein. This period of time varies between hours to days depending upon the disease state. Improvements in the chemical synthesis of RNA and DNA (Wincott et ah, Nucleic Acids Res.
- Polynucleotides of the present invention can include one or more (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,.8, 9, 10, or more) G-clamp nucleotides.
- a G-clamp nucleotide is a modified cytosine analog wherein the modifications confer the ability to hydrogen bond both Watson-Crick and Hoogsteen faces of a complementary guanine within a duplex, see, e.g., Lin and Matteucci, J. Am. Chem. Soc. ./20:8531-8532 (1998).
- a single G-clamp analog substitution within an oligonucleotide can result in substantially enhanced helical thermal stability and mismatch discrimination when hybridized to complementary oligonucleotides.
- the inclusion of such nucleotides in polynucleotides of the invention results in both enhanced affinity and specificity to nucleic acid targets, complementary sequences, or template strands.
- Polynucleotides of the present invention can also include one or more (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more) LNA "locked nucleic acid" nucleotides such as a 2', 4'-C mythylene bicyclo nucleotide (see, e.g., Wengel et al. t International PCT Publication No. WO 00/66604 and WO 99/14226).
- the present invention also features conjugates and/or complexes of siRNA molecules of the invention. Such conjugates and/or complexes can be used to facilitate delivery of siRNA molecules into a biological system, such as a cell.
- the conjugates and complexes provided by the instant invention can impart therapeutic activity by transferring therapeutic compounds across cellular membranes, altering the pharmacokinetics, and/or modulating the localization of nucleic acid molecules of the invention.
- the present invention encompasses the design and synthesis of novel conjugates and complexes for the delivery of molecules, including, but not limited to, small molecules, lipids, phospholipids, nucleosides, nucleotides, nucleic acids, antibodies, toxins, negatively charged polymers and other polymers,
- the transporters described are designed to be used either individually or as part of a multi-component system, with or without degradable linkers. • These compounds are expected to improve delivery and/or localization of nucleic acid molecules of the invention into a number of cell types originating from different tissues, in the presence or absence of serum (see Sullenger and Cech, U.S. Pat. No. 5,854,038). Conjugates of the molecules described herein can be attached to biologically active molecules via linkers that are biodegradable, such as biodegradable nucleic acid linker molecules.
- nucleic acid molecules are resistant to nucleases in order to function as effective intracellular therapeutic agents. Improvements in the chemical synthesis of nucleic acid molecules described in the instant invention and in the art have expanded the ability to modify nucleic acid molecules by introducing nucleotide modifications to enhance their nuclease stability as described above.
- the present invention also provides for siRNA molecules having chemical modifications that maintain or enhance enzymatic activity of proteins involved in RNAi. Such nucleic acids are also generally more resistant to nucleases than unmodified nucleic acids.
- polynucleoti de-based molecules of the invention will lead to better treatment of the disease progression by affording the possibility of combination therapies (e.g., multiple siRNA molecules targeted to different genes; nucleic acid molecules coupled with known small molecule modulators; or intermittent treatment with combinations of molecules, including different motifs and/or other chemical or biological molecules).
- combination therapies e.g., multiple siRNA molecules targeted to different genes; nucleic acid molecules coupled with known small molecule modulators; or intermittent treatment with combinations of molecules, including different motifs and/or other chemical or biological molecules.
- the treatment of subjects with siRNA molecules can also include combinations of different types of nucleic acid molecules, such as enzymatic nucleic acid molecules (ribozymes), allozymes, antisense, 2,5-A oligoadenylate, decoys, aptamers etc.
- a siRNA molecule of the invention can comprise one or more 5' and/or a 3 '-cap structures, for example on only the sense siRNA strand, antisense siRNA strand, or both siRNA strands.
- cap structure is meant chemical modifications, which have been incorporated at either terminus of the oligonucleotide (see, for example, Adamic et ah, U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203, incorporated by reference herein). These terminal modifications protect the nucleic acid molecule from exonuclease degradation, and may help in delivery and/or localization within a cell.
- the cap may be present at the 5'-terminus (5'-cap) or at the 3'-
- the 5'-cap is selected from the group comprising inverted abasic residue (moiety); 4',5'-methylene nucleotide; l-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4'-thio nucleotide; carbocyclic nucleotide; 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide; L-nucleotides; alpha-nucleotides; modified base nucleotide; phosphorodithioate linkage; threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide; acyclic 3',4'-seco nucleotide; acyclic 3,4-dihydroxybutyl nucleotide; acyclic 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, 3 '-3 '-inverted nucleotide
- the 3'-cap can be selected from a group comprising, 4',5 '-methylene nucleotide; 1- (beta-D-erythromranosyl) nucleotide; 4'-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide; 5'-amino-alkyl phosphate; l,3-diamino-2-propyl phosphate; 3-amino ⁇ ropyl phosphate; 6-aminohexyl phosphate; 1,2-aminododecyl phosphate; hydroxypropyl phosphate; 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide; L-nucleotide; alpha-nucleotide; modified base nucleotide; phosphorodithioate; threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide; acyclic 3',4'-seco nucleotide; 3,4-dihydroxybutyl
- nucleic acid siRNA structure can be made to enhance the utility of these molecules. Such modifications will enhance shelf-life, half-life in vitro, stability, and ease of introduction of such oligonucleotides to the target site, e.g., to enhance penetration of cellular membranes, and confer the ability to recognize and bind to targeted cells.
- Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or through triple-helix formation.
- Antisense techniques are discussed for example, in Okano, J. Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988).
- Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 10-1513 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 257:1300 (1991).
- the methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA.
- the 5* coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes may be used to design an antisense BNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs in length.
- a DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventing transcription and the production of the target protein.
- the antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into the target polypeptide.
- antisense nucleic acids for use in the methods of the present invention, specific for the NgR gene are produced intracellularly by transcription from an exogenous sequence.
- a vector or a portion thereof is transcribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA).
- RNA antisense nucleic acid
- Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the desired antisense RNA.
- Such vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in vertebrate cells.
- Expression of the antisense molecule can be by any promoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells, such as those described elsewhere herein.
- Absolute complementarity of an antisense molecule although preferred, is not required.
- a sequence complementary to at least a portion of an RNA encoding NgRl means a sequence having sufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forming a stable duplex; or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability to hybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and the length of the antisense nucleic acid.
- One skilled in the art can ascertain a tolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determine the melting point of the hybridized complex.
- Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of a messenger RNA should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation.
- sequences complementary to the 3' untranslated sequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibiting translation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., Nature 372:333-335 (1994).
- oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'- non- translated, non-coding regions could be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of NgRl.
- Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5' untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUG start codon.
- Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be used in accordance with the invention.
- - 61 - acids should be at least six nucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, at least 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides.
- Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers described below, can be DNA or BLNA or chimeric mixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded or double-stranded.
- the oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stability of the molecule, hybridization, etc.
- the oligonucleotide may include other appended groups such as peptides ⁇ e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A. 86:6553-6556 (1989); Lemaitre et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL 84:648-652 (1987)); PCT Publication No.
- oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.
- Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to, 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5- carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N-6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine, 1- methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5- methylcytosine, N-6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5- methoxyaminomethyl-2
- Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers may also comprise at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to, arabinose, 2-fiuoroarabinose. xylulose, and hexose.
- polynucleotides, including aptamers, for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including, but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof.
- an antisense oligonucleotide for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein is an ⁇ -anomeric oligonucleotide.
- An ⁇ -anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual situation, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625- 6641(1987)).
- the oligonucleotide is a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 75:6131-6148(1987)), or a chimeric KNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al, FEBS Lett. 2i5:327-330(1987)).
- Polynucleotides, including aptamers, for use in the methods of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.).
- an automated DNA synthesizer such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.
- phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209 (1988)
- methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. U.S.A. 85:7448- 7451(1988)), etc.
- Polynucleotide compositions for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein further include catalytic RNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO 90/11364, published October 4, 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247:1222-1225 (1990).
- the use of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleave mRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementary base pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the target mRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5'-UG-3'.
- ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 5 1 end of the target mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize the intracellular accumulation of nonfunctional mRNA transcripts.
- ribozymes for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be composed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.) and may be delivered to cells which express in vivo.
- DNA constructs e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.
- ribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described above for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA.
- a preferred method of delivery involves using a DNA construct "encoding" the ribozyme under the control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, pol III or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will produce sufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymes unlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellular concentration is required for efficiency.
- the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is an aptamer.
- An aptamer can be a nucleotide or a polypeptide which has a unique sequence, has the property of binding specifically to a desired target (e.g., a polypeptide), and is a specific ligand of a given target.
- Nucleotide aptamers of the invention include double stranded DNA and single stranded RNA molecules that bind to NgRl.
- Nucleic acid aptamers are selected using methods known in the art, for example via the Systematic Evolution of Ligands by Exponential Enrichment (SELEX) process.
- SELEX is a method for the in vitro evolution of nucleic acid molecules with highly specific binding to target molecules as described in e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,475,096, 5,580,737, 5,567,588, 5,707,796, 5,763,177, 6, 011,577, and 6,699,843, incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- Another screening method to identify aptamers is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,163 (also incorporated herein by reference).
- the SELEX process is based on the capacity of nucleic acids for forming a variety of two- and three- dimensional structures, as well as the chemical versatility available within the nucleotide monomers to act as ligands (form specific binding pairs) with virtually any chemical compound, whether monomelic or polymeric, including other nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides. Molecules of any size or composition can serve as targets.
- the SELEX method involves selection from a mixture of candidate oligonucleotides and step-wise iterations of binding, partitioning and amplification, using the same general selection scheme, to achieve desired binding affinity and selectivity.
- the SELEX method includes steps of contacting the mixture with the target under conditions favorable for binding; partitioning unbound nucleic acids from those nucleic acids which have bound specifically to target molecules; dissociating the nucleic acid-target complexes; amplifying the nucleic acids dissociated from the nucleic acid-target complexes to yield a ligand enriched mixture of
- Nucleotide aptamers may be used, for example, as diagnostic tools or as specific inhibitors to dissect intracellular signaling and transport pathways (James (2001) Curr. Opin. Pharmacol. 1:540-546). The high affinity and specificity of nucleotide aptamers makes them good candidates for drug discovery. For example, aptamer antagonists to the toxin ricin have been isolated and have IC50 values in the nanomolar range (Hesselberth JR et al. (2000) J Biol Chem 275:4937-4942). Nucleotide aptamers may also be used against infectious disease, malignancy and viral surface proteins to reduce cellular infectivity.
- Nucleotide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention may be modified (e.g., by modifying the backbone or bases or conjugated to peptides) as described herein for other polynucleotides.
- Polypeptide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention are random peptides selected for their ability to bind to and thereby block the action of NgRl.
- Polypeptide aptamers may include a short variable peptide domain attached at both ends to a protein scaffold. This double structural constraint greatly increases the binding affinity of the peptide aptamer to levels comparable to an antibody's (nanomolar range). See, e.g., Hoppe-Seyler F et al. (2000) JMo/ Med 7S(8):426-430.
- the length of the short variable peptide is typically about 10 to 20 amino acids, and the scaffold may be any protein which has good solubility and compacity properties.
- a scaffold protein is the bacterial protein Thioredoxin-A. See, e.g., Cohen BA et al. (1998) PNAS 95(2A): 14272-14277.
- Polypeptide aptamers are peptides or small polypeptides that act as dominant inhibitors of protein function. Peptide aptamers specifically bind to target proteins, blocking their functional ability (Kolonin et al. (1998) Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL 95: 14,266-14,271). Peptide aptamers that bind with high affinity and specificity to a target protein can be isolated by a variety of techniques known in the art.
- Peptide aptamers can be isolated from random peptide libraries by yeast two-hybrid screens (Xu, C.W., et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 94: 12,473-12,478) or by ribosome display (Hanes et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 94:4937- 4942). They can also be isolated from phage libraries (Hoogenboom, H.R., et al. (1998) Immunotechnology 4: 1-20) or chemically generated peptide libraries. Additionally,
- - 65 - polypeptide aptamers may be selected using the selection of Ligand Regulated Peptide
- Peptide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention may be modified (e.g., conjugated to polymers or fused to proteins) as described for other polypeptides elsewhere herein.
- Vectors comprising nucleic acids encoding NgRl antagonists may also be used to produce NgRl antagonists for use in the methods of the invention.
- the choice of vector and expression control sequences to which such nucleic acids are operably linked depends on the functional properties desired, e.g., protein expression, and the host cell to be transformed.
- Expression control elements useful for regulating the expression of an operably linked coding sequence are known in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, inducible promoters, constitutive promoters, secretion signals, and other regulatory elements. When an inducible promoter is used, it can be controlled, e.g., by a change in nutrient status, or a change in temperature, in the host cell medium.
- the vector can include a prokaryotic replicon, i.e., a DNA sequence having the ability to direct autonomous replication and maintenance of the recombinant DNA molecule extra-chromosomally in a bacterial host cell.
- a prokaryotic replicon i.e., a DNA sequence having the ability to direct autonomous replication and maintenance of the recombinant DNA molecule extra-chromosomally in a bacterial host cell.
- replicons are well known in the art.
- vectors that include a prokaryotic replicon may also include a gene whose expression confers a detectable marker such as a drug resistance. Examples of bacterial drug-resistance genes are those that confer resistance to ampicillin or tetracycline.
- Vectors that include a prokaryotic replicon can also include a prokaryotic or bacteriophage promoter for directing expression of the coding gene sequences in a bacterial host cell.
- Promoter sequences compatible with bacterial hosts are typically provided in plasmid vectors containing convenient restriction sites for insertion of a DNA segment to be expressed. Examples of such plasmid vectors are pUC8, pUC9, pBR322 and pBR329 (BioRad ® Laboratories), pPL and pKK223 (Pharmacia). Any suitable prokaryotic host can be
- vectors For the purposes of this invention, numerous expression vector systems may be employed.
- one class of vector utilizes DNA elements which are derived from animal viruses such as bovine papilloma virus, polyoma virus, adenovirus, vaccinia virus, baculovirus, retroviruses (RSV, MMTV or MOMLV) or SV40 virus.
- Others involve the use of polycistronic systems with internal ribosome binding sites.
- cells which have integrated the DNA into their chromosomes may be selected by introducing one or more markers which allow selection of transfected host cells. The marker may provide for pro to trophy to an auxotrophic host, biocide resistance (e.g., antibiotics) or resistance to heavy metals such as copper.
- the selectable marker gene can either be directly linked to the DNA sequences to be expressed, or introduced into the same cell by cotransformation.
- the neomycin phosphotransferase (neo) gene is an example of a selectable marker gene (Southern et al, J. MoI. Anal. Genet. 7:327-341 (1982)). Additional elements may also be needed for optimal synthesis of mRNA. These elements may include signal sequences, splice signals, as well as transcriptional promoters, enhancers, and termination signals.
- NEOSPLA Biogen IDEC, Inc.
- This vector contains the cytomegalovirus promoter/enhancer, the mouse beta globin major promoter, the SV40 origin of replication, the bovine growth hormone polyadenylation sequence, neomycin phosphotransferase exon 1 and exon 2, the dihydrofolate reductase gene and leader sequence.
- This vector has been found to result in very high-level expression upon transfection in CHO cells, followed by selection in G418-containing medium and methotrexate amplification.
- any expression vector which is capable of eliciting expression in eukaryotic cells may be used in the present invention.
- suitable vectors include, but are not limited to plasmids pcDNA3, pHCMV/Zeo, pCR3.1, pEFl/His, pIND/GS, pRc/HCMV2, pSV40/Zeo2, pTRACER-HCMV, ⁇ UB6/V5-His, pVAXl, and pZeoSV2 (available from Invitrogen, San Diego, CA), and plasmid pCI (available from Promega, Madison, WI). Additional eukaryotic cell expression vectors are known in the art and are commercially available.
- vectors typically contain convenient restriction sites for insertion of the desired DNA segment.
- exemplary vectors include pSVL and pKSV-10 (Pharmacia), pBPV-1, pml2d (International Biotechnologies), pTDTl (ATCC 31255), retroviral expression vector pMIG and pLL3.7, adenovirus shuttle vector pDC315, and AAV vectors.
- Other exemplary vector systems are disclosed e.g., in U.S. Patent 6,413,777.
- screening large numbers of transformed cells for those which express suitably high levels of the antagonist is routine experimentation which can be carried out, for example, by robotic systems.
- Frequently used regulatory sequences for mammalian host cell expression include viral elements that direct high levels of protein expression in mammalian cells, such as promoters and enhancers derived from retroviral LTRs, cytomegalovirus (CMV) (such as the CMV promoter/enhancer), Simian Virus 40 (SV40) (such as the SV40 promoter/enhancer), adenovirus, (e.g., the adenovirus major late promoter (AdmlP)), polyoma and strong mammalian promoters such as native immunoglobulin and actin promoters.
- CMV cytomegalovirus
- SV40 Simian Virus 40
- AdmlP adenovirus major late promoter
- polyoma e.g., the adenovirus major late promoter (AdmlP)
- AdmlP adenovirus major late promoter
- polyoma such as native immunoglobulin and actin promoters.
- the recombinant expression vectors may carry sequences that regulate replication of the vector in host cells (e.g., origins of replication) and selectable marker genes.
- the selectable marker gene facilitates selection of host cells into which the vector has been introduced (see, e.g., Axel, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,399,216; 4,634,665 and 5,179,017).
- the selectable marker gene confers resistance to a drug, such as G418, hygromycin or methotrexate, on a host cell into which the vector has been introduced.
- Frequently used selectable marker genes include the dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene (for use in dhfr- host cells with methotrexate selection/amplification) and the neo gene (for G418 selection).
- DHFR dihydrofolate reductase
- neo gene for G418 selection.
- Vectors encoding NgRl antagonists can be used for transformation of a suitable host cell. Transformation can be by any suitable method. Methods for introduction of exogenous DNA into mammalian cells are well known in the art and include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene-mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei.
- nucleic acid molecules may be introduced into mammalian cells by viral vectors.
- Transformation of host cells can be accomplished by conventional methods suited to the vector and host cell employed.
- electroporation and salt treatment methods can be employed (Cohen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 69:2110-14 (1972)).
- electroporation cationic lipid or salt treatment methods can be employed. See, e.g., Graham et al., Virology 52:456-467 (1973); Wigler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:1313-76 (1979).
- the host cell line used for protein expression is most preferably of mammalian origin; those skilled in the art are credited with ability to preferentially determine particular
- host cell lines which are best suited for the desired gene product to be expressed therein.
- Exemplary host cell lines include, but are not limited to NSO, SP2 cells, baby hamster kidney (BHK) cells, monkey kidney cells (COS), human hepatocellular carcinoma cells ⁇ e.g., Hep G2), A549 cells DG44 and DUXBIl (Chinese Hamster Ovary lines, DHFR minus), HELA (human cervical carcinoma), CVI (monkey kidney line), COS (a derivative of CVI with SV40 T antigen), R1610 (Chinese hamster fibroblast) BALBC/3T3 (mouse fibroblast), HAK (hamster kidney line), SP2/O (mouse myeloma), P3x63-Ag3.653 (mouse myeloma), BFA- IcIBPT (bovine endothelial cells), RAJI (human lymphocyte) and 293 (human kidney).
- Host cell lines are typically
- Glutaminase glutamine synthetase
- European Patent Nos. 0 216 846, 0 256 055, and 0 323 997 European Patent Application No. 89303964.4.
- Host cells for expression of an NgRl antagonist for use in a method of the invention may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic.
- exemplary eukaryotic host cells include, but are not limited to, yeast and mammalian cells, e.g., Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells (ATCC Accession No. CCL61), NIH Swiss mouse embryo cells NIH ⁇ 3T3 (ATCC Accession No. CRL1658), and baby hamster kidney cells (BHK).
- Other useful eukaryotic host cells include insect cells and plant cells.
- Exemplary prokaryotic host cells are E. coli and Streptomyces.
- An NgRl antagonist can be produced in vivo in a mammal, e.g., a human patient, using a gene-therapy approach to treatment of a nervous-system disease, disorder or injury in which promoting survival of oligodendrocytes or reduce demyelination of neurons would be therapeutically beneficial.
- Suitable viral vectors for such gene therapy include an adenoviral vector, an alphavirus vector, an enterovirus vector, a pestivirus vector, a lentiviral vector, a baculoviral vector, a herpesvirus vector, an Epstein Barr viral vector, a papovaviral vector, a poxvirus vector, a vaccinia viral vector, adeno-associated viral vector and a herpes simplex viral vector.
- the viral vector can be a replication-defective viral
- Adenoviral vectors that have a deletion in their El gene or E3 gene are typically used. When an adenoviral vector is used, the vector usually does not have a selectable marker gene.
- the NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention may be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions for administration to mammals, including humans.
- the pharmaceutical compositions used in the methods of this invention comprise pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, including, e.g., ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins, such as human serum albumin, buffer substances such as phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes, such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, zinc salts, colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, cellulose-based substances, polyethylene glycol, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, polyethylene glycol and wool fat.
- pharmaceutically acceptable carriers including, e.g.,
- compositions used in the methods of the present invention may be administered by any suitable method, e.g., parenterally, intraventricularly, orally, by inhalation spray, topically, rectally, nasally, buccally, vaginally or via an implanted reservoir.
- parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques.
- NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention act in the nervous system to promote survival of oligodendrocytes and recdue demyelination of neurons.
- the NgRl antagonists are administered in such a way that they cross the blood-brain barrier.
- This crossing can result from the physico-chemical properties inherent in the NgRl antagonist molecule itself, from other components in a pharmaceutical formulation, or from the use of a mechanical device such as a needle, cannula or surgical instruments to breach the blood-brain barrier.
- the NgRl antagonist is a molecule that does not inherently cross the blood-brain barrier, e.g., a fusion to a moiety that facilitates the crossing
- suitable routes of administration are, e.g., intrathecal or intracranial, e.g., directly into a chronic lesion of MS.
- Sterile injectable forms of the compositions used in the methods of this invention may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension. These suspensions may be formulated according to
- the sterile, injectable preparation may also be a sterile, injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a suspension in 1,3- butanediol.
- a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent for example as a suspension in 1,3- butanediol.
- acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
- sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
- any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides.
- Fatty acids, such as oleic acid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation of injectables, as are natural pharmaceutically acceptable oils, such as olive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions.
- oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant, such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions.
- a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions.
- Other commonly used surfactants such as Tweens, Spans and other emulsifying agents or bioavailability enhancers which are commonly used in the manufacture of pharmaceutically acceptable solid, liquid, or other dosage forms may also be used for the purposes of formulation.
- Parenteral formulations may be a single bolus dose, an infusion or a loading bolus dose followed with a maintenance dose. These compositions may be administered at specific fixed or variable intervals, e.g., once a day, or on an "as needed" basis.
- compositions used in the methods of this invention may be orally administered in an acceptable dosage form including, e.g., capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions. Certain pharmaceutical compositions also may be administered by nasal aerosol or inhalation. Such compositions may be prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersing agents.
- the amount of an NgRl antagonist that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated, the type of antagonist used and the particular mode of administration. The composition may be administered as a single dose, multiple doses or over an established period of time in an infusion. Dosage regimens also may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic or prophylactic response).
- the methods of the invention use a "therapeutically effective amount” or a “prophylactically effective amount” of an NgRl antagonist.
- a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount may vary according to factors such as the disease state, age,
- a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount is also one in which any toxic or detrimental effects are outweighed by the therapeutically beneficial effects.
- a specific dosage and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the particular NgRl antagonist used, the patient's age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet, and the time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the severity of the particular disease being treated. Judgment of such factors by medical caregivers is within the ordinary skill in the art.
- the amount will also depend on the individual patient to be treated, the route of administration, the type of formulation, the characteristics of the compound used, the severity of the disease, and the desired effect. The amount used can be determined by pharmacological and pharmacokinetic principles well known in the art.
- the NgRl antagonists are generally administered directly to the nervous system, intracerebroventricularly, or intrathecally, e.g. into a chronic lesion of MS.
- Compositions for administration according to the methods of the invention can be formulated so that a dosage of 0.001 — 10 mg/kg body weight per day of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide is administered. In some embodiments of the invention, the dosage is 0.01 — 1.0 mg/kg body weight per day. In some embodiments, the dosage is 0.001 — 0.5 mg/kg body weight per day.
- the dosage can range, e.g. , from about 0.0001 to 100 mg/kg, and more usually 0.01 to 5 mg/kg (e.g., 0.02 mg/kg, 0.25 mg/kg, 0.5 mg/kg, 0.75 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg, 2 mg/kg, etc.), of the host body weight.
- dosages can be 1 mg/kg body weight or 10 mg/kg body weight or within the range of 1-10 mg/kg, preferably at least 1 mg/kg.
- Doses intermediate in the above ranges are also intended to be within the scope of the invention.
- Subjects can be administered such doses daily, on alternative days, weekly or according to any other schedule determined by empirical analysis.
- An exemplary treatment entails administration in multiple dosages over a prolonged period, for example, of at least six months. Additional exemplary treatment regimes entail administration once per every two weeks or once a month or once every 3 to 6 months. Exemplary dosage schedules include 1-10 mg/kg or 15 mg/kg on consecutive days, 30 mg/kg on alternate days or 60 mg/kg weekly. In some methods, two or more monoclonal antibodies with different binding specificities are administered simultaneously, in which case the dosage of each antibody administered falls within the ranges indicated.
- a subject can be treated with a nucleic acid molecule encoding a NgRl antagonist polynucleotide.
- Doses for nucleic acids range from about 10 ng to 1 g, 100 ng to 100 mg, 1 ⁇ g to 10 mg, or 30-300 ⁇ g DNA per patient.
- Doses for infectious viral vectors vary from 10-100, or more, virions per dose.
- Supplementary active compounds also can be incorporated into the compositions used in the methods of the invention.
- a soluble NgRl polypeptide or a fusion protein may be coformulated with and/or coadministered with one or more additional therapeutic agents.
- the invention encompasses any suitable delivery method for an NgRl antagonist to a selected target tissue, including bolus injection of an aqueous solution or implantation of a controlled-release system. Use of a controlled-release implant reduces the need for repeat injections.
- the NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention may be directly infused into the brain.
- Various implants for direct brain infusion of compounds are known and are effective in the delivery of therapeutic compounds to human patients suffering from neurological disorders. These include chronic infusion into the brain using a pump, stereotactically implanted, temporary interstitial catheters, permanent intracranial catheter implants, and surgically implanted biodegradable implants. See, e.g., Gill et al, supra; Scharfen et al, "High Activity Iodine-125 Interstitial Implant For Gliomas," Int. J. Radiation Oncology Biol Phys.
- compositions may also comprise a NgRl antagonist dispersed in a biocompatible carrier material that functions as a suitable delivery or support system for the compounds.
- sustained release carriers include semipermeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles such as suppositories or capsules.
- Implantable or microcapsular sustained release matrices include polylactides (U.S. Patent No. 3,773,319; EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma- ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al, Biopolvmers 22:547-56 (1985)); poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), ethylene vinyl acetate
- an NgRl antagonist is administered to a patient by direct infusion into an appropriate region of the brain. See, e.g., Gill et al., "Direct brain infusion of glial cell line-derived neurotrophic factor in Parkinson disease," Nature Med. 9: 589-95 (2003).
- Alternative techniques are available and may be applied to administer an NgRl antagonist according to the invention. For example, stereotactic placement of a catheter or implant can be accomplished using the Riechert-Mundinger unit and the ZD (Zamorano- Dujovny) multipurpose localizing unit.
- a contrast-enhanced computerized tomography (CT) scan injecting 120 ml of omnipaque, 350 mg iodine/ml, with 2 mm slice thickness can allow three-dimensional multiplanar treatment planning (STP, Fischer, Freiburg, Germany). This equipment permits planning on the basis of magnetic resonance imaging studies, merging the CT and MRI target information for clear target confirmation.
- CT computerized tomography
- the Leksell stereotactic system (Downs Surgical, Inc., Decatur, GA) modified for use with a GE CT scanner (General Electric Company, Milwaukee, WI) as well as the Brown- Roberts- Wells (BRW) stereotactic system (Radionics, Burlington, MA) can be used for this purpose.
- a GE CT scanner General Electric Company, Milwaukee, WI
- BRW stereotactic system Radionics, Burlington, MA
- Serial CT sections can be obtained at 3 mm intervals though the (target tissue) region with a graphite rod localizer frame clamped to the base plate.
- a computerized treatment planning program can be run on a VAX 11/780 computer (Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Mass.) using CT coordinates of the graphite rod images to map between CT space and BRW space.
- the methods of treatment of demyelination or dysmyelination disorders as described herein are typically tested in vitro, and then in vivo in an acceptable animal model, for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans.
- Suitable animal models, including transgenic animals are will known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In vivo tests can be performed by creating transgenic mice which express the NgRl antagonist or by administering the NgRl antagonist to mice or rats in models as described in the Examples.
- the practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of cell biology, cell culture, molecular biology, transgenic biology, microbiology, recombinant DNA, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art.
- NgRl -310-Fc reduces apoptotic cell death induced by spinal cord transection injury in rat
- NgRl -310-Fc inhibits SAPK/JNK phosphorylation and increases AKT activity
- p75 neurotrophin receptor (p75NTR)-dependent apoptosis of oligodendrocytes is associated with an increase in Jun kinase (JNK) activity and caspase activation. Bhakar et al., J. Neuroscience 23(26):11373-11381 (2003).
- Akt has been shown to negatively regulates apoptotic pathways through phosphorylation. Dan et al., J. Biol. Chem, 27P(7):5405- 5412 (2004).
- NgRl-310-Fc was evaluated for its ability to decrease SAPK/JNK phosphorylation and increases AKT activity.
- NgRl-310-Fc Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl-310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by continuous intrathecal infusion via an osmotic minipump implanted in the subcutaneous space. See Ji et al., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(3):587-594 (2005). Spinal cord tissue from around the lesion area was harvested 3 days after injury and protein was extracted for Western blot analysis. Blots were probed with anti-JNK, anti-phospho-JNK, anti-AKT or anti-phospho-AKT antibodies available from, e.g., Cell Signalling Technologies.
- NgRl-Ig treatment significantly reduced the level of phospho-JNK expression and significantly increased the level of phospho-AKT in spinal cord homegenates indicating that NgRl-Ig treatment inhibits oligodendrocyte cell death after SCI.
- NgRl-310-Fc inhibits caspase-3 activation in oligodendrocytes following spinal cord injury
- NgRl-310-Fc was evaluated for its ability to inhibit caspase-3 activation. Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl-310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by
- the level of activated caspase-3 expression in oligodendrocytes expressed as the ratio of the number of cells with both CCl and caspase-3 positive to total number of CCl positive cells was determined.
- NgR 1-310-Fc treatment reduces degraded myelin basic protein (dMBP) expression in spinal cord after spinal cord injury
- dMBP spinal cord injury
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Neurosurgery (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Psychology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
- Nutrition Science (AREA)
- Obesity (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Psychiatry (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
Abstract
The invention provides methods of treating diseases, disorsers or injuries involving oligodendrocyte death, demyelination and dysmyelination, including spinal cord injury, by the administration of an NgR1 antagonist.
Description
Use of Nogo Receptor-1 (NgRl) Antagonists for Promoting Oligodendrocyte
Survival
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Field of the Invention
[0001] This invention relates to neurobiology, neurology and pharmacology. More particularly, it relates to methods of promoting oligodendrocyte survival by the administration of Nogo receptor-1 (NgRl) antagonists.
Background Art
[0002] Oligodendrocytes undergo apoptotic cell death following spinal cord injury (SCI), which may contribute to demyelination of survived axons and prevent function recovery. Casha et al, Neuroscience /05:203-218 (2001) and Crowe et al, Nat. Med. 3:73-76 (1997). p75, the neurotrophin receptor, is upregulated after SCI and responsible for the death of oligodendrocytes. Beattie et al, Neuron 35:375-386. (2002) and Dubreuil et al, J. Cell. Biol. I62(2):233-243 (2003). p75 has been identified as a coreceptor of the NgR/Lingo-1 (Sp35)/Taj/p75 receptor complex. Wang et al, Nature 420(6911):74-78 (2002), Park et al, Neuron 4J(5):815 (2005), and Shao et al, Neuron 45(3):353-359 (2005). p75-mediated cell death has also been associated with activation of an intracellular GTPase, Rho-A. Li et al, J. Neurosci. 24(46):10511-10520 (2004). In previous studies, it has been shown that Nogo receptor (NgRl) inhibitor, soluble NgR-310-Fc significantly improved motor function recovery and axonal regeneration after SCI by blocking the Nogo signaling pathway. Fournier et al, J. Neuroscience 2_?:8876-8883 (2002). However, therapies to prevent oligodendrocyte cell death and demyelination of axons following spinal cord injury and other diseases involved in oligodendrocyte death and demyelination are also needed.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0003] The present invention is based on the discovery that certain antagonists of NgRl promote survival of oligodendrocytes as well as reducing demyelination of neurons. Based on these discoveries, the invention relates generally to methods of reducing demyelination and promoting survival of oligodendrocytes by the administration of a NgRl antagonist. [0004] In certain embodiments, the invention provides a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes, comprising contacting the oligodendrocytes with an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist.
[0005] In further embodiments, the invention includes a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes in a mammal, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist.
[0006] In certain embodiments, the invention includes a method for reducing demyelination of neurons, comprising contacting a mixture of neurons and oligodendrocytes with a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist.
[0007] In other embodiments, the invention includes a method for reducing demyelination of neurons in a mammal, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a NgRl antagonist. In certain embodiments, the mammal has been diagnosed with a disease, disorder, injury or condition involving oligodendrocyte death or demyelination or dysmyelination. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, injury or condition is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease. Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), Globoid cell Leucodystrophy (Krabbe's disease), Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, post radiation injury, neurologic complications of chemotherapy, stroke, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency, isolated vitamin E deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Kornzweig syndrome, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, and Bell's palsy. In one embodiment, the disease, disorder, or injury is spinal cord injury.
[0008] Additionally, the invention includes a method of treating a disease, disorder or injury in a mammal involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antaonist. Additional embodiments include a method of treating a disease, disorder or injury in a mammal involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin comprising (a) providing a cultured host cell expressing a recombinant NgRl antagonist; and (b) introducing the host cell into the mammal at or near the site of the nervous system disease, disorder or injury. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or injury is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), Globoid cell Leucodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's 'disease, Parkinson's
- 2 -
disease, traumatic brain injury, post radiation injury, neurologic complications of chemotherapy, stroke, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency, isolated vitamin E deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Komzweig syndrome, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, and Bell's palsy. In some embodiments, the cultured host cell is derived from the mammal to be treated.
[0009] Further embodiments of the invention include a method of treating a disease, disorder or injury involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin by in vivo gene therapy, comprising administering to a mammal, at or near the site of the disease, disorder or injury, a vector comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes an NgRl antagonist so that the NgRl antagonist is expressed from the nucleotide sequence in the mammal in an amount sufficient to promote myelination of neurons at or near the site of the injury. In certain embodiments, the vector is a viral vector which is selected from the group consisting of an adenoviral vector, an alphavirus vector, an enterovirus vector, a pestivirus vector, a lentiviral vector, a baculoviral vector, a herpesvirus vector, an Epstein Barr viral vector, a papovaviral vector, a poxvirus vector, a vaccinia viral vector, and a herpes simplex viral vector. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or injury is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), Globoid cell Leucodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, post radiation injury, neurologic complications of chemotherapy, stroke, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency, isolated vitamin E deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Kornzweig syndrome, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, and Bell's palsy. In some embodiments, the vector is administered by a route selected from the group consisting of topical administration, intraocular administration, parenteral administration, intrathecal administration, subdural administration and subcutaneous administration.
[0010] In various embodiments of the above methods, the NgRl antagonist is selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody and an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide (e.g., RNA interference), an NgRl aptamer, or a combination of two or more NgRl antagonists.
[0011] Certain soluble Sp35 polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, soluble NgRl polypeptide that are 90% identical to a reference
- 3 -
amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; and a combination of one ore more of said reference amino acid sequences. In certain embodiments, the soluble NgRl polypeptide for use in the methods of the present invention is selected from the group consisting of: amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2; amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ 3D NO:2; amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ED NO:2; amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ED NO:2; variants or derivatives of any of said polypeptide fragments; and a combination of at least two of said polypeptide fragments or variants or derivatives thereof. En certain embodiments, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention comprises an NgRl antibody, or fragment thereof that binds to a soluble NgRl polypeptide.
[0012] In various embodiments of the above methods, the Ngrl antagonist comprises a a soluble NgRl polypeptide wherein at least one cysteine residue is substituted with a different amino acid. En some embodiments, the at least one cysteine residue is C266. En some embodiments, the at least one cysteine residue is C309. In some embodiments, the at least one cysteine residue is C335. En some embodiments, the at least one cysteine residue is at C336. En some embodiments, the at least one cysteine residue is substituted with a different amino acid selected from the group consisting of alanine, serine and threonine. In some embodiments, the replacement amino acid is alanine.
[0013] En certain other embodiments, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention comprises an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of an antisense polynucleotide; a ribozyme; a small interfering RNA (siRNA); and a small-hairpin RNA (shRNA). .
[0014] En some embodiments, the NgRl antagonist polynucleotide for use in the present methods is an antisense polynucleotide comprising at least 10 bases complementary to the coding portion of the NgRl mRNA. In some embodiments, the polynucleotide is a ribozyme. [0015] In further embodiments, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a siRNA or a shRNA. En some embodiments, the invention provides that that siRNA or the shRNA inhibits NgRl expression. In some embodiments, the invention further
- 4 -
provides that the siRNA or shRNA is at least 90% identical to the nucleotide sequence comprising: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or
CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO:10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12). In other embodiments, the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO: 8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
[0016] In some embodiments, the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is complementary to the mRNA produced by the polynucleotide sequence GATGAAGAGGGCGTCCGCT (SEQ ID NO:9) or GGGCCTGGCTGCAGAAGTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) or GACTGGTGACTCAGAAGGC (SEQ ID NO: 13).
[00171 In some embodiments, the NgRl antagonist is administered by bolus injection or chronic infusion. In some embodiments, the soluble NgRl polypeptide is administered directly into the central nervous system. In some embodiments, the soluble NgRl polypeptide is administered directly into a chronic lesion of MS.
[0018] In some embodiments, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a soluble NgRl polypeptide that is cyclic. In some embodiments, the cyclic polypeptide further comprises a first molecule linked at the N-terminus and a second molecule linked at the C-terminus; wherein the first molecule and the second molecule are joined to each other to form said cyclic molecule. In some embodiments, the first and second molecules are selected from the group consisting of: a biotin molecule, a cysteine residue, and an acetylated cysteine residue. In some embodiments, the first molecule is a biotin molecule attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention. In some embodiments, the first molecule is an acetylated cysteine residue attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention. In some embodiments, the first molecule is an acetylated cysteine residue attached to the N-terminus and the second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of the polypeptide of the invention. In some embodiments, the C-terminal cysteine has an NH2 moiety attached.
[0019] In some embodiments, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is a fusion polypeptide comprising a non-NgRl moiety. In some embodiments, the non-NgRl moiety is selected from the group consisting of an antibody Ig moiety, a serum albumin moiety, a targeting moiety, a reporter moiety, and a purification-facilitating moiety. In some embodiments, the antibody Ig moiety is a hinge and Fc moiety.
- 5 -
[0020] In some embodiments, the polypeptides and antibodies of the present invention are conjugated to a polymer. In some embodiments, the polymer is selected from the group consisting of a polyalkylene glycol, a sugar polymer, and a polypeptide. In some embodiments, the polyalkylene glycol is polyethylene glycol (PEG). In some embodiments, the polypeptides and antibodies of the present invention are conjugated to 1, 2, 3 or 4 polymers. In some embodiments, the total molecular weight of the polymers is from 5,000 Da to 100,000 Da.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRA WINGS/FIGURES
[0021] Figure IA-B shows the effect of NgRl-310-Fc on post-spinal cord injury (SCI) apoptosis of oligodendrocytes.
[0022] Figure 2A-B shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on SAPK/JNK phosphorylation and
AKT activity.
[0023] Figure 3A-B shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on caspase-3 activation in oligodendrocytes following SCI.
[0024] Figure 4 shows the effect of NgRl -310-Fc on degraded myelin basic protein
(dMBP) expression following SCI.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Definitions
[0025] Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present application including the definitions will control. Unless otherwise required by context, singular terms shall include pluralities and plural terms shall include the singular. All publications, patents and other references mentioned herein are incorporated by reference in their entireties for all purposes as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
[0026] Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in practice or testing of the present invention, suitable methods and materials are described below. The materials, methods and examples are illustrative only and are not intended to be limiting. Other features and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the detailed description and from the claims.
[0027] In order to further define this invention, the following terms and definitions are provided.
- 6 -
[0028] It is to be noted that the term "a" or "an" entity, refers to one or more of that entity; for example, "an immunoglobulin molecule," is understood to represent one or more immunoglobulin molecules. As such, the terms "a" (or "an"), "one or more," and "at least one" can be used interchangeably herein.
[0029] Throughout this specification and claims, the word "comprise," or variations such as "comprises" or "comprising," indicate the inclusion of any recited integer or group of integers but not the exclusion of any other integer or group of integers.
[0030] As used herein, the term "consists of," or variations such as "consist of or "consisting of," as used throughout the specification and claims, indicate the inclusion of any recited integer or group of integers, but that no additional integer or group of integers may be added to the specified method, structure or composition.
[0031] As used herein, the term "consists essentially of," or variations such as "consist essentially of or "consisting essentially of," as used throughout the specification and claims, indicate the inclusion of any recited integer or group of integers, and the optional inclusion of any recited integer or group of integers that do not materially change the basic or novel properties of the specified method, structure or composition.
[0032] As used herein and in United States patent application 60/402,866, "Nogo receptor," "NogoR," "NogoR-1," "NgR," "NgR-I," "NgRl" and "NGRl" each means Nogo receptor-1. [0033] As used herein, a "therapeutically effective amount" refers to an amount effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary, to achieve a desired therapeutic result. A therapeutic result may be, e.g.,, lessening of symptoms, prolonged survival, improved mobility, and the like. A therapeutic result need not be a "cure".
[0034] As used herein, a "prophylactically effective amount" refers to an amount effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary, to achieve the desired prophylactic result. Typically, since a prophylactic dose is used in subjects prior to or at an earlier stage of disease, the prophylactically effective amount will be less than the therapeutically effective amount. [0035] As used herein, a "polynucleotide" can contain the nucleotide sequence of the full length cDNA sequence, including the untranslated 5' and 3' sequences, the coding sequences, as well as fragments, epitopes, domains, and variants of the nucleic acid sequence. The polynucleotide can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA. For example, polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double- stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-
- 7 -
stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions. In addition, the polynucleotides can be composed of triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. polynucleotides may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons. "Modified" bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine. A variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, "polynucleotide" embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms.
[0036J In the present invention, a polypeptide can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, e.g., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids (e.g. non-naturally occuring amino acids). The polypeptides of the present invention may be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain many types of modifications. Polypeptides may be branched , for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination. (See, for instance, Proteins - Structure And Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., T.E. Creighton, W.H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993); Posttranslational Covalent Modification of Proteins, B.C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York, pgs. 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al, Meth Enzymol 182:626-646 (1990); Rattan et al., Ann NY Acad Sci 663:48-62 (1992).)
- 8 -
[0037] The terms "fragment," "variant," "derivative" and "analog" when referring to an NgRl antagonist of the present invention include any antagonist molecules which retain at least some ability to inhibit NgRl activity. NgRl antagonists as described herein may include fragment, variant, or derivative molecules therein without limitation, so long as the NgRl antagonist still serves its function. Soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may include NgRl proteolytic fragments, deletion fragments and in particular, fragments which more easily reach the site of action when delivered to an animal. Polypeptide fragments further include any portion of the polypeptide which comprises an antigenic or immunogenic epitope of the native polypeptide, including linear as well as three-dimensional epitopes. Soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may comprise variant NgRl regions, including fragments as described above, and also polypeptides with altered amino acid sequences due to amino acid substitutions, deletions, or insertions. Variants may occur naturally, such as an allelic variant. By an "allelic variant" is intended alternate forms of a gene occupying a given locus on a chromosome of an organism. Genes π, Lewin, B., ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1985). Non-naturally occurring variants may be produced using art-known mutagenesis techniques. Soluble NgRl polypeptides may comprise conservative or non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions or additions. NgRl antagonists of the present invention may also include derivative molecules. For example, soluble NgRl polypeptides of the present invention may include NgRl regions which have been altered so as to exhibit additional features not found on the native polypeptide. Examples include fusion proteins and protein conjugates.
[0038] In the present invention, a "polypeptide fragment" refers to a short amino acid sequence of an NgRl polypeptide. Protein fragments may be "free-standing," or comprised within a larger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part of region. Representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising about 5 amino acids, about 10 amino acids, about 15 amino acids, about 20 amino acids, about 30 amino acids, about 40 amino acids, about 50 amino acids, about 60 amino acids, about 70 amino acids, about 80 amino acids, about 90 amino acids, and about 100 amino acids in length.
[0039] In certain embodiment, the NgRl antagonists for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein are "antibody" or "immunoglobulin" molecules, or immunospecific fragments thereof, e.g., naturally occurring antibody or immunoglobulin molecules or engineered antibody molecules or fragments that bind antigen in a manner similar to antibody molecules. The terms "antibody" and "immunoglobulin" are used interchangeably herein. An antibody or
- 9 -
immunoglobulin comprises at least the variable domain of a heavy chain, and normally comprises at least the variable domains of a heavy chain and a light chain. Basic immunoglobulin structures in vertebrate systems are relatively well understood. See, e.g., Harlow et ah, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988).
[0040] As will be discussed in more detail below, the term "immunoglobulin" comprises five broad classes of polypeptides that can be distinguished biochemically. All five classes are clearly within the scope of the present invention, the following discussion will generally be directed to the IgG class of immunoglobulin molecules. With regard to IgG, a standard immunoglobulin molecule comprises two identical light chain polypeptides of molecular weight approximately 23,000 Daltons, and two identical heavy chain polypeptides of molecular weight 53,000-70,000. The four chains are typically joined by disulfide bonds in a "Y" configuration wherein the light chains bracket the heavy chains starting at the mouth of the "Y" and continuing through the variable region.
[0041] Both the light and heavy chains are divided into regions of structural and functional homology. The terms "constant" and "variable" are used functionally. In this regard, it will be appreciated that the variable domains of both the light (VL) and heavy (VH) chain portions determine antigen recognition and specificity. Conversely, the constant domains of the light chain (CL) and the heavy chain (CHI, CH2 or CH3) confer important biological properties such as secretion, transplacental mobility, Fc receptor binding, complement binding, and the like. By convention the numbering of the constant region domains increases as they become more distal from the antigen binding site or amino-terminus of the antibody. The N-terrninal portion is a variable region and at the C-terminal portion is a constant region; the CH3 and CL domains actually comprise the carboxy-terminus of the heavy and light chain, respectively. [0042] Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda (K, λ). Each heavy chain class may be bound with either a kappa or lambda light chain. In general, the light and heavy chains are covalently bonded to each other, and the "tail" portions of the two heavy chains are bonded to each other by covalent disulfide linkages or non-covalent linkages when the immunoglobulins are generated either by hybridomas, B cells or genetically engineered host cells. In the heavy chain, the amino acid sequences run from an N-terminus at the forked ends of the Y configuration to the C-terminus at the bottom of each chain. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, (γ, μ, α, δ, ε) with some subclasses among them (e.g., γl-γ4). It is the nature of this chain that
- 10 -
deteππines the "class" of the antibody as IgG, IgM, IgA IgG, or IgE5 respectively. The immunoglobulin subclasses (isotypes) e.g., IgGi, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1, etc. are well characterized and are known to confer functional specialization. Modified versions of each of these classes and isotypes are readily discernable to the skilled artisan in view of the instant disclosure and, accordingly, are within the scope of the instant invention. [0043] As indicated above, the variable region allows the antibody to selectively recognize and specifically bind epitopes on antigens. That is, the VL domain and VH domain of an antibody combine to form the variable region that defines a three dimensional antigen binding site. This quaternary antibody structure forms the antigen binding site present at the end of each arm of the Y. More specifically, the antigen binding site is defined by three complementary determining regions (CDRs) on each of the VH and VL chains. In some instances, e.g., certain immunoglobulin molecules derived from camelid species or engineered based on camelid immunoglobulins, a complete immunoglobulin molecule may consist of heavy chains only, with no light chains. See, e.g., Hamers-Casterman et al., Nature 555:446-448 (1993).
[0044] In naturally occurring antibodies, the six "complementarity determining regions" or "CDRs" present in each antigen binding domain are short, non-contiguous sequences of amino acids that are specifically positioned to form the antigen binding domain as the antibody assumes its three dimensional configuration in an aqueous environment. The remainder of the amino acids in the antigen binding domains, referred to as "framework" regions, show less inter-molecular variability. The framework regions largely adopt a β-sheet conformation and the CDRs form loops which connect, and in some cases form part of, the β-sheet structure. Thus, framework regions act to form a scaffold that provides for positioning the CDRs in correct orientation by inter-chain, non-covalent interactions. The antigen binding domain formed by the positioned CDRs defines a surface complementary to the epitope on the immunoreactive antigen. This complementary surface promotes the non-covalent binding of the antibody to its cognate epitope. The amino acids comprising the CDRs and the framework regions, respectively, can be readily identified for any given heavy or light chain variable region by one of ordinary skill in the art, since they have been precisely defined (see, "Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest," Kabat, E., et al, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, (1983); and Chothia and Lesk, J. MoL Biol. : 196:901-917 (1987), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties).
- 11 -
[0045] In camel id species, however, the heavy chain variable region, referred to as VHH, forms the entire CDR. The main differences between camelid VHH variable regions and those derived from conventional antibodies (VH) include (a) more hydrophobic amino acids in the light chain contact surface of VH as compared to the corresponding region in VHH, (b) a longer CDR3 in VHH, and (c) the frequent occurrence of a disulfide bond between CDRl and CDR3 in VHH.
[0046] In one embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least one heavy or light chain CDR of an antibody molecule. In another embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least two CDRs from one or more antibody molecules. In another embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least three CDRs from one or more antibody molecules. In another embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least four CDRs from one or more antibody molecules. Ih another embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least five CDRs from one or more antibody molecules. In another embodiment, an antigen binding molecule of the invention comprises at least six CDRs from one or more antibody molecules. Exemplary antibody molecules comprising at least one CDR that can be included in the subject antigen binding molecules are known in the art and exemplary molecules are described herein.
[0047] Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal, monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized, primatized, or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, epitope-binding fragments, e.g., Fab, Fab1 and F(ab')2, Fd, Fvs, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chain antibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv), fragments comprising either a VL or VH domain, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, and anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to binding molecules disclosed herein). ScFv molecules are known in the art and are described, e.g., in US patent 5,892,019. Immunoglobulin or antibody molecules of the invention can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA, and IgY), class (e.g., IgGi, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1 and IgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule. [0048] Antibody fragments, including single-chain antibodies, may comprise the variable region(s) alone or in combination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. Also included in the invention are antigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variable region(s) with a hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein may be from any animal origin including birds and
- 12 -
mammals. Preferably, the antibodies are human, murine, donkey, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, llama, horse, or chicken antibodies. In another embodiment, the variable region may be condricthoid in origin (e.g., from sharks). As used herein, "human" antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence of a human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from human immunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or more human immunoglobulins and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins, as described infra and, for example in, U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,598 by Kucherlapati et al.
[00491 As used herein, the term "heavy chain portion" includes amino acid sequences derived from an immunoglobulin heavy chain. A polypeptide comprising a heavy chain portion comprises at least one of: a CHI domain, a hinge (e.g., upper, middle, and/or lower hinge region) domain, a CH2 domain, a CH3 domain, or a variant or fragment thereof. For example, a binding polypeptide for use in the invention may comprise a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, and a CH2 domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain and a CH3 domain; a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, and a CH3 domain, or a polypeptide chain comprising a CHI domain, at least a portion of a hinge domain, a CH2 domain, and a CH3 domain. In another embodiment, a polypeptide of the invention comprises a polypeptide chain comprising a CH3 domain. Further, a binding polypeptide for use in the invention may lack at least a portion of a CH2 domain (e.g., all or part of a CH2 domain). As set forth above, it will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that these domains (e.g., the heavy chain portions) may be modified such that they vary in amino acid sequence from the naturally occurring immunoglobulin molecule. [0050] In certain NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecifϊc fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein, the heavy chain portions of one polypeptide chain of a multimer are identical to those on a second polypeptide chain of the multimer. Alternatively, heavy chain portion-containing monomers for use in the methods of the invention are not identical. For example, each monomer may comprise a different target binding site, forming, for example, a bispecific antibody.
[0051] The heavy chain portions of a binding polypeptide for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein may be derived from different immunoglobulin molecules. For example, a heavy chain portion of a polypeptide may comprise a CHI domain derived from an IgGi molecule and a hinge region derived from an IgG3 molecule. In another example, a heavy chain portion can comprise a hinge region derived, in part, from an IgGi molecule and,
- 13 -
in part, from an IgG3 molecule. In another example, a heavy chain portion can comprise a chimeric hinge derived, in part, from an IgGi molecule and, in part, from an' IgG4 molecule. [0052] As used herein, the term "light chain portion" includes amino acid sequences derived from an immunoglobulin light chain. Preferably, the light chain portion comprises at least one of a VL or CL domain.
[0053] An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a non-natural variant of a polypeptide derived from an immunoglobulin (e.g. , an immunoglobulin heavy chain portion or light chain portion) can be created by introducing one or more nucleotide substitutions, additions or deletions into the nucleotide sequence of the immunoglobulin such that one or more amino acid substitutions, additions or deletions are introduced into the encoded protein. Mutations may be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR- mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more non-essential amino acid residues.
[0054] Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein may also be described or specified in terms of their binding affinity to a polypeptide of the invention. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 x W2 M, 10"2 M, 5 x 10"3 M, 10'3 M, 5 x 1(T4 M, 10"4 M, 5 x 10"5 M, Kr5 M, 5 x 10"6 M, 10"6 M, 5 x 10"7 M, 1(T7 M, 5 x 1(T8 M, 1(T8 M, 5 x 10"9 M, 10"9 M, 5 x 10'10 M, l<r10 M, 5 x 10"11 M, 10"11 M, 5 x 10"12 M5 10"12 M, 5 x 10"13 M, lO"13 M, 5 x 10"14 M, 10"14 M5 5 x 10"15 M, or 10'15 M.
[0055] Antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein act as antagonists of NgRl as described herein. For example, an antibody for use in the methods of the present invention may function as an antagonist, blocking or inhibiting the suppressive activity of the NgRlpolypeptide.
[0056] As used herein, the term "chimeric antibody" will be held to mean any antibody wherein the immunoreactive region or site is obtained or derived from a first species and the constant region (which may be intact, . partial or modified in accordance with the instant invention) is obtained from a second species. In preferred embodiments the target binding region or site will be from a non-human source (e.g. mouse or primate) and the constant region is human.
[0057] As used herein, the term "engineered antibody" refers to an antibody in which the variable domain in either the heavy and light chain or both is altered by at least partial replacement of one or more CDRs from an antibody of known specificity and, if necessary, by partial framework region replacement and sequence changing. Although the CDRs may be
- 14 -
derived from an antibody of the same class or even subclass as the antibody from which the framework regions are derived, it is envisaged that the CDRs will be derived from an antibody of different class and preferably from an antibody from a different species. An engineered antibody in which one or more "donor" CDRs from a non-human antibody of known specificity is grafted into a human heavy or light chain framework region is referred to herein as a "humanized antibody." It may not be necessary to replace all of the CDRs with the complete CDRs from the donor variable region to transfer the antigen binding capacity of one variable domain to another. Rather, it may only be necessary to transfer those residues that are necessary to maintain the activity of the target binding site. Given the explanations set forth in, e.g., U. S. Pat. Nos. 5,585,089, 5,693,761, 5,693,762, and 6,180,370, it will be well within the competence of those skilled in the art, either by carrying out routine experimentation or by trial and error testing to obtain a functional engineered or humanized antibody. [0058] As used herein, the terms "linked," "fused" or "fusion" are used interchangeably. These terms refer to the joining together of two more elements or components, by whatever means including chemical conjugation or recombinant means. An "in-frame fusion" refers to the joining of two or more open reading frames (ORFs) to form a continuous longer ORF, in a manner that maintains the correct reading frame of the original ORFs. Thus, the resulting recombinant fusion protein is a single protein containing two ore more segments that correspond to polypeptides encoded by the original ORFs (which segments are not normally so joined in nature.) Although the reading frame is thus made continuous throughout the fused segments, the segments may be physically or spatially separated by, for example, in-frame linker sequence.
[0059] In the context of polypeptides, a "linear sequence" or a "sequence" is an order of amino acids in a polypeptide in an amino to carboxyl terminal direction in which residues that neighbor each other in the sequence are contiguous in the primary structure of the polypeptide. [0060] The term "expression" as used herein refers to a process by which a gene produces a biochemical, for example, an RNA or polypeptide. The process includes any manifestation of the functional presence of the gene within the cell including, without limitation, gene knockdown as well as both transient expression and stable expression. It includes without limitation transcription of the gene into messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA (tRNA), small hairpin RNA (shRNA), small interfering RNA (siRNA) or any other RNA product and the translation of such mRNA into polypeptide(s). If the final desired product is biochemical, expression includes the creation of that biochemical and any precursors.
' - 15 -
[0061] By "subject" or "individual" or "animal" or "patient" or "mammal," is meant any subject, particularly a mammalian subject, for whom diagnosis, prognosis, or therapy is desired. Mammalian subjects include, but are not limited to, humans, domestic animals, farm animals, zoo animals, sport animals, pet animals such as dogs, cats, guinea pigs, rabbits, rats, mice, horses, cattle, cows; primates such as apes, monkeys, orangutans, and chimpanzees; canids such as dogs and wolves; felids such as cats, lions, and tigers; equids such as horses, donkeys, and zebras; food animals such as cows, pigs, and sheep; ungulates such as deer and giraffes; rodents such as mice, rats, hamsters and guinea pigs; and so on. In certain embodiments, the mammal is a human subject.
[0062] The term "RNA interference" or "RNAi" refers to the silencing or decreasing of gene expression by siRNAs. It is the process of sequence-specific, post-transcriptional gene silencing in animals and plants, initiated by siRNA that is homologous in its duplex region to the sequence of the silenced gene. The gene may be endogenous or exogenous to the organism, present integrated into a chromosome or present in a transfection vector that is not integrated into the genome. The expression of the gene is either completely or partially inhibited. RNAi may also be considered to inhibit the function of a target RNA; the function of the target RNA may be complete or partial.
NgRl
[0063] The invention is based on the discovery that antagonists of NgRl increase oligodendrocyte numbers by promoting their survival.
[0064] The rat NgRl polypeptide is shown below as SEQ ID NO: 1.
[0065] FuU-Length Rat (SEQ ID NO: 1):
MKIM-SSGGSRLLAWXnLWLQAWRVATPCPGACVCYTSrEPKVTTSCPQQGLQAVPTGIPASSQRIFLHGNRI SHVPAASFQSCRNLTILWLHSNALARID AAAFTGLTLLEQLDLSDNAQLHWDPTTFHGLGHLHTLHLDR CGLRELGPGLFRGLAALQ YLYLQDNNLQALPDNTFRDLGNLTHLFLHGNRIPSVPEHAFRGLHSLDRLLL HQNHVARVHPHAFRDLGRLMTLYLFANNLSMLPAEVLMPLRSLQYLRLNDNP WVCDCRARPLWAWL QKFRGSSSEVPCNLPQRLADRDLKRLAASDLEGCAVASGPFRPIQTSQLTDEELLSLPKCCQPDAADKAS VLEPGRPASAGNALKGRVPPGDTPPGNGSGPRHINDSPFGTLPSSAEPPLTALRPGGSEPPGLPTTGPRRRP GCSRKNRTRSHCRLGQAGSGASGTGDAEGSGALPALACSLAPLGLALVLWTVLGPC
[0066] The human NgRl polypeptide is shown below as SEQ ID NO:2. [0067] Full-Length Human (SEQ ID NO:2)
MK-RASAGGSRLLAWVLWLQAWQVAAPCPGACVCYNEPKVTTSCPQQGLQAVPVGIPAASQRIFLHGN
RISHVP AASFRACRNLTILWLHSNVLARID AAAFTGLALLEQLDLSDNAQLRS VDPATFHGLGRLHTLHL
DRCGLQELGPGLFRGLAALQYLYLQDNALQALPDDTFRDLGNLTHLFLHGNRISSVPERAFRGLHSLDRL
LLHQNRVAHVHPHAFRDLGRLMTLYLFANNLSALPTEALAPLRALQYLRLNDNP WVCDCRARPLW AW
LQKFRGSSSEVPCSLPQRLAGRDLK-RJLAANDLQGCAVATGPYHPIWTGRATDEEPLGLPKCCQPDAADK
ASVLEPGRPASAGNALKGRVPPGDSPPGNGSGPRHINDSPFGTLPGSAEPPLTAVRPEGSEPPGFPTSGPRR
RPGCSRKNRTRSHCRLGQAGSGGGGTGDSEGSGALPSLTCSLTPLGLALVLWTVLGPC
- 16 -
[0068] The mouse polypeptide is shown below as SEQ ID NO :3.
[0069] Full-Length Mouse (SEQ ID NO:3):
IVUKRASSGGSRLLAWVLWLQAWRVATPCPGACVCYT^PKVTΓSCPQQGLQAVPTGIPASSQRIFLHGNRI SHVP AASFQSCRNLTILWLHSNALARIDAAAFTGLTLLEQLDLSDNAQLHVVDPTTFHGLGHLHTLHLDR
CGLRELGPGLFRGLAALQ YLVLQDNNLQALPDNTFRDLGNLTHLFLHGNRIPSVPEHAFRGLHSLDRLLL HQNHVARVHPHAFRDLGRLMTLYLF ANNLSMLPAEVLMPLRSLQYLRLNDNPWVCDCRARPLWAWL QKFRGSSSEVPCNLPQRLADRDLK-RLAASDLEGCAVASGPFRPIQTSQLTDEELLSLPKCCQPDAADKAS VXEPGRPASAGNALKGRVPPGDTPPGNGSGPRHINDSPFGTLPSSAEPPLTALRPGGSEPPGLPTTGPRRRP GCSRKNRTRSHCRLGQAGSGASGTGDAEGSGALPALACSLAPLGLALVLWTVLGPC
[0070] Full-length Nogo receptor- 1 consists of a signal sequence, a N-terminus region (NT), eight leucine rich repeats (LRR), a LRRCT region (a leucine rich repeat domain C- terminal of the eight leucine rich repeats), a C-terminus region (CT) and a GPI anchor. [0071] The NgR domain designations used herein are defined as follows:
TABLE 1. Example NgR domains
Treatment Methods Using Antagonists of NgRl
[0072] One embodiment of the present invention provides methods for treating a disease, disorder or injury associated with demyelination, e.g., spinal cord injury, the method comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering to the animal an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody and an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide.
- 17 -
[00731 Additionally, the invention is directed to a method for reducing demyelination of neurons in a mammal comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
[0074] An additional embodiment of the present invention provides methods for treating a disease, disorder or injury associated with oligodendrocyte death, e.g., spinal cord injury, multiple sclerosis, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease or globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease), in an animal suffering from such disease, the method comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering to the animal an effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer, or a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists
[00751 Another aspect of the invention includes a method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes in a mammal comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of administering a therapeutically effective amount of an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide, an NgRl aptamer and a combination thereof.
[00761 An NgRl antagonist, e.g., a soluble NgRlpolypeptide, an NgRl antibody, an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide or an NgRl aptamer, to be used in treatment methods disclosed herein, can be prepared and used as a therapeutic agent that stops, reduces, prevents, or inhibits demyelination of axons. Additionally, the NgRl antagonist to be used in treatment methods disclosed herein can be prepared and used as a therapeutic agent tliat stops, reduces, prevents, or inhibits oligodendrocyte death.
[00771 Further embodiments of the invention include a method of inducing oligodendrocyte survival to treat a disease, disorder or injury involving the destruction of oligodendrocytes or myelin (e.g., spinal cord injury) comprising administering to a mammal, at or near the site of the disease, disorder or injury, in an amount sufficient to promote myelination. [0078] In methods of the present invention, an NgRl antagonist can be administered via direct administration of a soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl antibody, NgRl antagonist polynucleotide or NgRl aptamer to the patient. Alternatively, the NgRl antagonist can be administered via an expression vector which produces the specific NgRl antagonist. In certain embodiments of the invention, an NgRl antagonist is administered in a treatment method that includes: (1) transforming or transfecting an implantable host cell with a nucleic acid, e.g., a
- 18 -
vector, that expresses an NgRl antagonist; and (2) implanting the transformed host cell into a mammal, at the site of a disease, disorder or injury. For example, the transformed host cell can be implanted at the site of a chronic lesion of MS. In some embodiments of the invention, the implantable host cell is removed from a mammal, temporarily cultured, transformed or transfected with an isolated nucleic acid encoding an antagonist, and implanted back into the same mammal from which it was removed. The cell can be, but is not required to be, removed from the same site at which it is implanted. Such embodiments, sometimes known as ex vivo gene therapy, can provide a continuous supply of the antagonist, localized at the site of action, for a limited period of time.
[0079] Diseases or disorders which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include diseases, disorders or injuries which relate to dysmyelination or demyelination of mammalian neurons. Specifically, diseases and disorders in which the myelin which surrounds the neuron is either absent, incomplete, not formed properly or is deteriorating. Such disease include, but are not limited to, multiple sclerosis (MS) including relapsing remitting, secondary progressive and primary progressive forms of MS; progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease), Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis and transvere myelitis.
[0080] Diseases or disorders which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include diseases, disorders or injuries which relate to the death of oligodendrocytes. Such disease include, but are not limited to, multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ), globoid cell leukodystrophy (Krabbe's disease) and Wallerian Degeneration. [0081] Diseases or disorders, which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include neuro degenerate disease or disorders. Such diseases include, but are not limited to, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease.
[0082] Examples of additional diseases, disorders or injuries which may be treated or ameliorated by the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited, to spinal cord injuries, chronic myelopathy or rediculopathy, tramatic brain injury, motor neuron disease, axonal shearing, contusions, paralysis, post radiation damage or other neurological complications of chemotherapy, stroke, large lacunes, medium to large vessel occlusions,
- 19 -
leukoariaosis, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency (isolated deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Komzweig syndrome), B12, B6 (pyridoxine - pellagra), thiamine, folate, nicotinic acid deficiency, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, Metachromatic Leukodystrophy, Trigeminal neuralgia, Bell's palsy, or any neural injury which would require axonal regeneration, remylination or oligodendrocyte survival.
Soluble NgRl Polypeptides
[0083] Some embodiments provide a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide for use in the methods of the present invention. Soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention comprise an NT domain; 8 LRRs and an LRRCT domain and lack a signal sequence and a functional GPI anchor (i.e., no GPI anchor or a GPI anchor that lacks the ability to efficiently associate to a cell membrane). Table 1 above describes the various domains of the NgRlpolypeptide.
[0084] In some embodiments, a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide for use in the present methods comprises a heterologous LRR. In some embodiments of the present methods, a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide comprises 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 heterologous LRRs. A heterologous LRR means an LRR obtained from a protein other than Nogo receptor-1. Exemplary proteins from which a heterologous LRR can be obtained are toll-like receptor (TLRl.2); T-cell activation leucine repeat rich protein; deceorin; oligodendrocyte-myelin glycoprotein (OMgp)+; insulin-like growth factor binding protein acidic labile subunit slit and robo; and toll-like receptor 4.
[0085] Further soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide of 319 amino acids (soluble Nogo receptor-1 344, sNogoRl-344, or sNogoR344) (residues 26-344 of SEQ ID NOs:4 and 6 or residues 27- 344 of SEQ DD NO:6) for use in the methods of the invention. In some embodiments, the invention provides a soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptide of 285 amino acids (soluble Nogo receptor-1 310, sNogoRl-310, or sNogoR310) (residues 26-310 of SEQ ID NOs: 5 and 7 or residues 27-310 of SEQ ID NO:7) for use in the methods of the invention.
TABLE 2. Sequences of Human and Rat Nogo receptor-1 Polypeptides
SEQ ID NO: 4 MKRASAGGSRLLAWVLWLQAWQVAAPCPGACVCYNEPKVTTSCPQQGL (human 1-344) QAWVGIPAASQRIFLHGNRISHVPAASFRACRNLTILWLHSNVLARIDAA
AFTGLALLEQLDLSDNAQLRSVDPATFHGLGRLHTLHLDRCGLQELGPGL
FRGLAALQYLYLQDNALQALPDDTFRDLGNLTHLFLHGNRISSVPERAFR
GLHSLDRLLLHQNRVAHVHPHAFRDLGRLMTLYLFANNLSALPTEALAPL
RALQYLRLNDNPWVCDCRARPLWAWLQKFRGSSSEVPCSLPQRLAGRDL
KRLAANDLQGCA VATGPYHPIWTGRATDEEPLGLPKCCQPDAADKA
[0086] Additional soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention include soluble NgRl polypeptides with amino acid substitutions. Exemplary amino acid substitutions for polypeptide fragments . according to this embodiment include substitutions of individual cysteine residues in the polypeptides of the invention with different amino acids. Any heterologous amino acid may be substituted for a cysteine in the polypeptides of the invention. Which different amino acid is used depends on a number of criteria, for example, the effect of the substitution on the conformation of the polypeptide fragment, the charge of the polypeptide fragment, or the hydrophilicity of the polypeptide fragment. In certain embodiments, the cysteine is substituted with a small uncharged amino acid which is least likely to alter the three dimensional conformation of the polypeptide, e.g., alanine, serine, threonine, preferably alanine. Cysteine residues that can substituted include, but are not limited to, C266, C309, C335 and C336. Making such substitutions through engineering of a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide fragment is well within the routine expertise of one of ordinary skill in the art.
[0087] In some embodiments of the invention, the soluble Nogo receptor-1 polypeptides are used in the methods of the invention to inhibit apoptotic death of oligodendrocytes and decrease demyelination of neurons. In some embodiments, the neuron is a CNS neuron. [0088] Soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention described herein may be cyclic. Cyclization of the soluble NgRl polypeptides reduces the conformational freedom of linear peptides and results in a more structurally constrained molecule. Many methods of peptide cyclization are known in the art, for example, "backbone
- 21 -
to backbone" cyclization by the formation of an amide bond between the N-terminal and the C- teπninal amino acid residues of the peptide. The "backbone to backbone" cyclization method includes the formation of disulfide bridges between two ω-thio amino acid residues {e.g. cysteine, homocysteine). Certain soluble NgRl peptides of the present invention include modifications on the N- and C- terminus of the peptide to form a cyclic NgRl polypeptide. Such modifications include, but are not limited, to cysteine residues, acetylated cysteine residues cystein residues with a NH2 moiety and biotin. Other methods of peptide cyclization are described in Li & Roller. Curr. Top. Med. Chem. 3:325-341 (2002) and U.S. Patent Publication No. U.S. 2005-0260626 Al, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
[0089] Corresponding fragments of soluble NgRl polypeptides at least 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% identical to polypeptides of SEQ ID NO:2 described herein are also contemplated.
[0090] As known in the art, "sequence identity" between two polypeptides is determined by comparing the amino acid sequence of one polypeptide to the sequence of a second polypeptide. When discussed herein, whether any particular polypeptide is at least about 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identical to another polypeptide can be determined using methods and computer programs/software known in the art such as, but not limited to, the BESTFIT program (Wisconsin Sequence Analysis Package, Version 8 for Unix, Genetics Computer Group, University Research Park, 575 Science Drive, Madison, WI 53711). BESTFIT uses the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman, Advances in Applied Mathematics 2:482-489 (1981), to find the best segment of homology between two sequences. When using BESTFIT or any other sequence alignment program to determine whether a particular sequence is, for example, 95% identical to a reference sequence according to the present invention, the parameters are set, of course, such that the percentage of identity is calculated over the full length of the reference polypeptide sequence and that gaps in homology of up to 5% of the total number of amino acids in the reference sequence are allowed. [0091] Soluble NgRl polypeptides for use in the methods of the present invention may include any combination of two or more soluble NgRl polypeptides.
Antibodies or Immunospecific Fragments Thereof
[0092] NgRl antagonists for use in the methods of the present invention also include NgRl -specific antibodies or antigen-binding fragments, variants, or derivatives. Certain
- 22 -
antagonist antibodies for use in the methods described herein specifically or preferentially binds to a particular NgRl polypeptide fragment or domain
[0093] In certain embodiments, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds specifically to at least one epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above, i.e., binds to such an epitope more readily than it would bind to an unrelated, or random epitope; binds preferentially to at least one epitope of or fragment or variant described above, i.e., binds to such an epitope more readily than it would bind to a related, similar, homologous, or analogous epitope; competitively inhibits binding of a reference antibody which itself binds specifically or preferentially to a certain epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above; or binds to at least one epitope of NgRl or fragment or variant described above with an affinity characterized by a dissociation constant KD of less than about 5 x 10"2 M, about 10'2M5 about 5 x 10"3 M, about 10"3 M, about 5 x 10"4 M, about 10"4M, about 5 x 10"5 M, about 10"5M, about 5 x 10"6M, about 10"6M, about 5 x 10"7 M, about 10"7 M, about 5 x 10"8 M, about 10"8M, about 5 x 10"9M, about 10"9M, about 5 x 10"10 M, about 10"10M, about 5 x 10"u M, about 10"11 M, about 5 x 10'12 M, about 10"12 M, about 5 x 10'13 M, about 10"13M, about 5 x 10"14 M, about 10"14M, about 5 x 10"15M, or about 10"15 M. In a particular aspect, the antibody or fragment thereof preferentially binds to a human NgRl polypeptide or fragment thereof, relative to a murine polypeptide or fragment thereof. [0094] As used in the context of antibody binding dissociation constants, the term "about" allows for the degree of variation inherent in the methods utilized for measuring antibody affinity. For example, depending on the level of precision of the instrumentation used, standard error based on the number of samples measured, and rounding error, the term "about 10"2 M" might include, for example, from 0.05 M to 0.005 M.
[0095] In specific embodiments, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an off rate (k(off» of less than or equal to 5 X 10"2 sec"1, 10"2 sec'1, 5 X 10"3 sec"1 or lO'3 sec" . Alternatively, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an off rate (k(off)) of less than or equal to 5 X 10"4 sec"1, 10"4 sec"1, 5 X 10"5 sec"1, or 10"5 sec"1 5 X 10"6 sec"1, 10"6 sec"1, 5 X 10"7 sec"1 or lO'7 sec"1.
[0096] In other embodiments, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) of greater than or equal to 103 M"1 sec"1, 5 X 103 M"1 sec"1, 104 M"1 sec"1 . or 5 X 104 M"1 sec"1. Alternatively, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment, variant, or
- 23 -
derivative thereof of the invention binds NgRl polypeptides or fragments or variants thereof with an on rate (k(on)) greater than or equal to 105 M"1 sec"1, 5 X 10s M"1 sec"1, 106 M"1 sec"1, or 5 X 106 M"1 sec"1 or 107 M"1 sec"1.
[0097] In ohe embodiment, a NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the invention is ari antibody molecule, or immunospecific fragment thereof. Unless it is specifically noted, as used herein a "fragment thereof in reference to an antibody refers to an immunospecific fragment, i.e., an antigen-specific fragment. In one embodiment, an antibody of the invention is a bispecific binding molecule, binding polypeptide, or antibody, e.g., a bispecific antibody, minibody, domain deleted antibody, or fusion protein having binding specificity for more than one epitope, e.g., more than one antigen or more than one epitope on the same antigen. In one embodiment, a bispecific antibody has at least one binding domain specific for at least one epitope on NgRl. A bispecific antibody may be a tetravalent antibody that has two target binding domains specific for an epitope of NgRl and two target binding domains specific for a second target. Thus, a tetravalent bispecific antibody may be bivalent for each specificity. [0100] In certain embodiments of the present invention comprise administration of an antagonist antibody, or immunospecific fragment thereof, in which at least a fraction of one or more of the constant region domains has been deleted or otherwise altered so as to provide desired biochemical characteristics such as reduced effector functions, the ability to non- covalently dimerize, increased ability to localize at the site of a tumor, reduced serum half-life, or increased serum half-life when compared with a whole, unaltered antibody of approximately the same immunogenicity. For example, certain antibodies for use in the treatment methods described herein are domain deleted antibodies which comprise a polypeptide chain similar to an immunoglobulin heavy chain, but which lack at least a portion of one or more heavy chain domains. For instance, in certain antibodies, one entire domain of the constant region of the modified antibody will be deleted, for example, all or part of the CH2 domain will be deleted. [0101] In certain NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the therapeutic methods described herein, the Fc portion may be mutated to decrease effector function using techniques known in the art. For example, the deletion or inactivation (through point mutations or other means) of a constant region domain may reduce Fc receptor binding of the circulating modified antibody thereby increasing tumor localization. In other cases it may be that constant region modifications consistent with the instant invention moderate complement binding and thus reduce the serum half life and nonspecific association of a conjugated cytotoxin. Yet other modifications of the constant region may be used to modify disulfide linkages or oligosaccharide moieties that allow for enhanced localization due
- 24 -
to increased antigen specificity or antibody flexibility. The resulting physiological profile, bioavailability and other biochemical effects of the modifications, such as tumor localization, biodistribution and serum half-life, may easily be measured and quantified using well know immunological techniques without undue experimentation.
[0102] Modified forms of antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be made from whole precursor or parent antibodies using techniques known in the art. Exemplary techniques are discussed in more detail herein.
[0103] In certain embodiments both the variable and constant regions of NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein are fully human. Fully human antibodies can be made using techniques that are known in the art and as described herein. For example, fully human, antibodies against a specific antigen can be prepared by administering the antigen to a transgenic animal which has been modified to produce such antibodies in response to antigenic challenge, but whose endogenous loci have been disabled. Exemplary techniques that can be used to make such antibodies are described in US patents: 6,150,584; 6,458,592; 6,420,140. Other techniques are known in the art. Fully human antibodies can likewise be produced by various display technologies, e.g., phage display or other viral display systems, as described in more detail elsewhere herein. [0104] NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein can be made or manufactured using techniques that are known in the art. hi certain embodiments, antibody molecules or fragments thereof are "recombinantly produced," i.e., are produced using recombinant DNA technology. Exemplary techniques for making antibody molecules or fragments thereof are discussed in more detail elsewhere herein.
[0105] NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein include derivatives that are modified, e.g., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibody such that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody from specifically binding to its cognate epitope. For example, but not by way of limitation, the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have been modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic
- 25 -
synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non- classical amino acids.
[0106] In preferred embodiments, an NgRl antagonist antibody or immunospecific fragment thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein will not elicit a deleterious immune response in the animal to be treated, e.g., in a human. Ih one embodiment, antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein may be modified to reduce their immunogenicity using art-recognized techniques. For example, antibodies can be humanized, primatized, deimmunized, or chimeric antibodies can be made. These types of antibodies are derived from a non-human antibody, typically a murine or primate antibody, that retains or substantially retains the antigen-binding properties of the parent antibody, but which is less immunogenic in humans. This may be achieved by various methods, including (a) grafting the entire non-human variable domains onto human constant regions to generate chimeric antibodies; (b) grafting at least a part of one or more of the non-human complementarity determining regions (CDRs) into a human framework and constant regions with or without retention of critical framework residues; or (c) transplanting the entire non-human variable domains, but "cloaking" them with a human-like section by replacement of surface residues. Such methods are disclosed in Morrison et al. Proc Natl. Acad. ScL 87:6851-6855 (1984); Morrison et al., Adv. Immunol. 44:65-92 (1988); Verhoeyen et al, Science 239:1534-1536 (1988); Padlan, Molec. Immun. 25:489-498 (1991); Padlan, Molec. Immun. 37:169-217 (1994), and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,585,089, 5,693,761, 5,693,762, and 6,190,370, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. [0107] De-immunization can also be used to decrease the immunogenicity of an antibody. As used herein, the term "de-immunization" includes alteration of an antibody to modify T cell epitopes (see, e.g., WO9852976A1, WO0034317A2). For example, VH and VL sequences from the starting antibody are analyzed and a human T cell epitope "map" from each V region showing the location of epitopes in relation to complementarity-determining regions (CDRs) and other key residues within the sequence. Individual T cell epitopes from the T cell epitope map are analyzed in order to identify alternative amino acid substitutions with a low risk of altering activity of the final antibody. A range of alternative VH and VL sequences are designed comprising combinations of amino acid substitutions and these sequences are subsequently incorporated into a range of binding polypeptides, e.g., NgRl antagonist antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof for use in the diagnostic and treatment methods disclosed herein, which are then tested for function. Typically, between 12 and 24 variant antibodies are generated and tested. Complete heavy and light chain genes comprising
- 26 -
modified V and human C regions are then cloned into expression vectors and the subsequent plasmids introduced into cell lines for the production of whole antibody. The antibodies are then compared in appropriate biochemical and biological assays, and the optimal variant is identified.
[0108] NgRl antagonist antibodies or fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention may be generated by any suitable method known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies can be produced by various procedures well known in the art. For example, a immunospecific fragment can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.
[0109] Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof. For example, monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. (1988); Hammerling et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-CeIl Hybridomas Elsevier, N.Y., 563-681 (1981) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties). The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology. The term "monoclonal antibody" refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced. Thus, the term "monoclonal antibody" is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology. Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma and recombinant and phage display technology.
[0110] Using art recognized protocols, in one example, antibodies are raised in mammals by multiple subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections of the relevant antigen (e.g., purified NgRl antigens or cells or cellular extracts comprising such antigens) and an adjuvant. This immunization typically elicits an immune response that comprises production of antigen-
- 27 -
reactive antibodies from activated splenocytes or lymphocytes. While the resulting antibodies may be harvested from the serum of the animal to provide polyclonal preparations, it is often desirable to isolate individual lymphocytes from the spleen, lymph nodes or peripheral blood to provide homogenous preparations of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs). Preferably, the lymphocytes are obtained from the spleen.
[0111] In this well known process (Kohler et al, Nature 256:495 (1975)) the relatively short-lived, or mortal, lymphocytes from a mammal which has been injected with antigen are fused with an immortal tumor cell line (e.g. a myeloma cell line), thus, producing hybrid cells or "hybridomas" which are both immortal and capable of producing the genetically coded antibody of the B cell. The resulting hybrids are segregated into single genetic strains by selection, dilution, and regrowth with each individual strain comprising specific genes for the formation of a single antibody. They produce antibodies which are homogeneous against a desired antigen and, in reference to their pure genetic parentage, are termed "monoclonal." [0112] Hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that reagents, cell lines and media for the formation, selection and growth of hybridomas are commercially available from a number of sources and standardized protocols are well established. Generally, culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are growing is assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies against the desired antigen. Preferably, the binding specificity of the monoclonal antibodies produced by hybridoma cells is determined by in vitro assays such as immunoprecipitation, radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA). After hybridoma cells are identified that produce antibodies of the desired specificity, affinity and/or activity, the clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press, pp 59-103 (1986)). It will further be appreciated that the monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones may be separated from culture medium, ascites fluid or serum by conventional purification procedures such as, for example, protein- A, hydroxyl apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis or affinity chromatography. [0113] Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab')2 fragments may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments). F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain.
- 28 -
[0114] Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that DNA encoding antibodies or antibody fragments (e.g., antigen binding sites) may also be derived from antibody phage libraries. In a particular, such phage can be utilized to display antigen-binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine). Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead. Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein. Exemplary methods are set forth, for example, in EP 368 684 Bl; U.S. patent. 5,969,108, Hoogenboom, H.R. and Chames, Immunol. Today 21:371 (2000); Nagy et al. Nat. Med. 5:801 (2002); Huie et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 95:2682 (2001); Lui et al., J. MoI. Biol. 315:1063 (2002), each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Several publications (e.g., Marks et al., Bio/Technology 10:779-783 (1992)) have described the production of high affinity human antibodies by chain shuffling, as well as combinatorial infection and in vivo recombination as a strategy for constructing large phage libraries. In another embodiment, Ribosomal display can be used to replace bacteriophage as the display platform (see, e.g., Hanes et al., Nat. Biotechnol. iδ:1287 (2000); Wilson et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 98:3750 (2001); or Irving et al., J. Immunol. Methods 248:31 (2001)). hi yet another embodiment, cell surface libraries can be screened for antibodies (Boder et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Set USA 97:10701 (2000); Daugherty et al., J. Immunol. Methods 243:211 (2000)). Such procedures provide alternatives to traditional hybridoma techniques for the isolation and subsequent cloning of monoclonal antibodies.
10115] In phage display methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them. In particular, DNA sequences encoding VH and VL regions are amplified from animal cDNA libraries (e.g., human or murine cDNA libraries of lymphoid tissues) or synthetic cDNA libraries. In certain embodiments, the DNA encoding the VH and VL regions are joined together by an scFv linker by PCR and cloned into a phagemid vector (e.g., p CANTAB 6 or pComb 3 HSS). The vector is electroporated in E. coli and the E. coli is infected with helper phage. Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 and the VH or VL regions are usually recombinantly fused to either the phage gene in or gene VIII. Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds to an antigen of interest (i.e., a NgRl polypeptide or a
- 29 -
fragment thereof) can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead.
[0116] Additional examples of phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies include those disclosed in Brinkman et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 182:41-50 (1995); Ames et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177-186 (1995); Kettleborough et al, Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 (1994); Persic et ah, Gene 187:9-1% (1997); Burton et al, Advances in Immunology 57:191-280 (1994); PCT Application No. PCT/GB91/01134; PCT publications WO 90/02809; WO 91/10737; WO 92/01047; WO 92/18619; WO 93/11236; WO 95/15982; WO 95/20401; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,698,426; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,580,717; 5,427,908; 5,750,753; 5,821,047; 5,571,698; 5,427,908; 5,516,637; 5,780,225; 5,658,727; 5,733,743 and 5,969,108; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. [0117] As described in the above references, after phage selection, the antibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used to generate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any other desired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host, including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, and bacteria. For example, techniques to recombinantly produce Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 fragments can also be employed using methods known in the art such as those disclosed in PCT publication WO 92/22324; Mullinax et al, BioTechniques i2(15):864-869 (1992); and Sawai et ah, AJRI 34:26-34 (1995); and Better et ah, Science 240:1041-1043 (1988) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties).
[0118] Examples of techniques which can be used to produce single-chain Fvs and antibodies include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,946,778 and 5,258,498; Huston et ah, Methods in Enzymology 203:46-88 (1991); Shu et ah, PNAS 90:7995-7999 (1993); and Skerra et ah, Science 240:1038-1040 (1988). For some uses, including in vivo use of antibodies in humans and in vitro detection assays, it may be preferable to use chimeric, humanized, or human antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region. Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. See, e.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et ah, BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Gillies et ah, J. Immunol. Methods 125:191-202 (1989); U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and framework
- 30 -
regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule. Often, framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding. These framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,089; Riechmann et al, Nature 332:323 (1988), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.) Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(o>.805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al, PNAS 91:969-913 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,332).
[0119] Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients. Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. [0120] Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes. For example, the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells. Alternatively, the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes. The mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered non-functional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination, in particular, homozygous deletion of the JH region prevents endogenous antibody production. The modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygous offspring that express human antibodies. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a desired target polypeptide. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology. The human
- 31 -
immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B-cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA, IgM and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93 (1995). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., PCT publications WO 98/24893; WO 96/34096; WO 96/33735; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,413,923; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; 5,814,318; and 5,939,598, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont, Calif.) and GenPharm (San Jose, Calif.) can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above.
[0121] Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as "guided selection." In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g. , a mouse antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope. (Jespers et ah, Bio/Technology 72:899-903 (1988)). See also, U.S. Patent No. 5,565,332.
[0122] In another embodiment, DNA encoding desired monoclonal antibodies may be readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies). The isolated and subcloned hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulins. More particularly, the isolated DNA (which may be synthetic as described herein) may be used to clone constant and variable region sequences for the manufacture antibodies as described in Newman et at., U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,570, filed January 25, 1995, which is incorporated by reference herein. Essentially, this entails extraction of PJMA from the selected cells, conversion to cDNA, and amplification by PCR using Ig specific primers. Suitable primers for this purpose are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,570. As will be discussed in more detail below, transformed cells expressing the desired antibody may be grown up in relatively large quantities to provide clinical and commercial supplies of the immunoglobulin.
- 32 -
[0123] Ih a specific embodiment, the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/or light chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequences of the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that are well know in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequences of other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regions of sequence hypervariability. Using routine recombinant DNA techniques, one or more of the CDRs maybe inserted within framework regions, e.g., into human framework regions to humanize a non-human antibody. The framework regions may be naturally occurring or consensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions (see, e.g., Chothia et al, J. MoI. Biol. 278:457-479 (1998) for a listing of human framework regions). Preferably, the polynucleotide generated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodes an antibody that specifically binds to at least one epitope of a desired polypeptide, e.g., NgRl . Preferably, one or more amino acid substitutions may be made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acid substitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen. Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutions or deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibody molecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds. Other alterations to the polynucleotide are encompassed by the present invention and within the skill of the art. [0124] In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. 57:851-855 (1984); Neuberger et al, Nature 312:604- 608 (1984); Takeda et al, Nature 3/4:452-454 (1985)) by splicing genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. As used herein, a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies.
[0125] Alternatively, techniques described for. the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,694,778; Bird, Science 242:423-442 (1988); Huston et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 55:5879-5883 (1988); and Ward et al, Nature 334:544-554 (1989)) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain antibody. Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E coli may also be used (Skerra et al, Science 242:1038-1041 (1988)).
[0126] NgRl antagonist antibodies may also be human or substantially human antibodies generated in transgenic animals (e.g., mice) that are incapable of endogenous immunoglobulin
- 33 -
production (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,075,181, 5,939,598, 5,591^669 and 5,589,369 each of which is incorporated herein by reference). For example, it has been described that the homozygous deletion of the antibody heavy-chain joining region in chimeric and germ-line mutant mice results in complete inhibition of endogenous antibody production. Transfer of a human immunoglobulin gene array to such germ line mutant mice will result in the production of human antibodies upon antigen challenge. Another preferred means of generating human antibodies using SCUD mice is disclosed in. U.S. Pat. No. 5,811,524 which is incorporated herein by reference. It will be appreciated that the genetic material associated with these human antibodies may also be isolated and manipulated as described herein. [0127] Yet another highly efficient means for generating recombinant antibodies is disclosed by Newman, Biotechnology 10: 1455-1460 (1992). Specifically, this technique results in the generation of primatized antibodies that contain monkey variable domains and human constant sequences. This reference is incorporated by reference in its entirety herein. Moreover, this technique is also described in commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,658,570, 5,693,780 and 5,756,096 each of which is incorporated herein by reference. [0128] In another embodiment, lymphocytes can be selected by micromanipulation and the variable genes isolated. For example, peripheral blood mononuclear cells can be isolated from an immunized mammal and cultured for about 7 days in vitro. The cultures can be screened for specific IgGs that meet the screening criteria. Cells from positive wells can be isolated. Individual Ig-producing B cells can be isolated by FACS or by identifying them in a complement-mediated hemolytic plaque assay. Ig-producing B cells can be micromanipulated into a tube and the VH and VL genes can be amplified using, e.g., RT-PCR. The VH and VL genes can be cloned into an antibody expression vector and transfected into cells (e.g., eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells) for expression.
[0129] Alternatively, antibody-producing cell lines may be selected and cultured using techniques well known to the skilled artisan. Such techniques are described in a variety of laboratory manuals and primary publications. In this respect, techniques suitable for use in the invention as described below are described in Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et ah, Eds., Green Publishing Associates and Wiley-Interscience, John Wiley and Sons, New York (1991) which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety, including supplements. [0130] Antibodies for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be produced by any method known in the art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques as described herein.
- 34 -
[0131] It will further be appreciated that the scope of this invention further encompasses all alleles, variants and mutations of antigen binding DNA sequences.
[0132] As is well known, RNA may be isolated from the original hybridoma cells or from other transformed cells by standard techniques, such as guanidinium isothiocyanate extraction and precipitation followed by centrifugation or chromatography. Where desirable, mRNA may be isolated from total RNA by standard techniques such as chromatography on oligo dT cellulose. Suitable techniques are familiar in the art.
[0133] In one embodiment, cDNAs that encode the light and the heavy chains of the antibody may be made, either simultaneously or separately, using reverse transcriptase and DNA polymerase in accordance with well known methods. PCR may be initiated by consensus constant region primers or by more specific primers based on the published heavy and light chain DNA and amino acid sequences. As discussed above, PCR also may be used to isolate DNA clones encoding the antibody light and heavy chains. In this case the libraries may be screened by consensus primers or larger homologous probes, such as mouse constant region probes.
[0134] DNA, typically plasmid DNA, may be isolated from the cells using techniques known in the art, restriction mapped and sequenced in accordance with standard, well known techniques set forth in detail, e.g., in the foregoing references relating to recombinant DNA techniques. Of course, the DNA may be synthetic according to the present invention at any point during the isolation process or subsequent analysis.
[0135] Recombinant expression of an antibody, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof, e.g. , a heavy or light chain of an antibody which is an NgRl antagonist, requires construction of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody. Once a polynucleotide encoding an antibody molecule or a heavy or light chain of an antibody, or portion thereof (preferably containing the heavy or light chain variable domain), of the invention has been obtained, the vector for the production of the antibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing a protein by expressing a polynucleotide containing an antibody encoding nucleotide sequence are described herein. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional and translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. The invention, thus, provides replicable vectors comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody molecule of the invention, or a heavy or light chain
- 35 -
thereof, or a heavy or light chain variable domain, operably linked to a promoter. Such vectors may include the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibody molecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO 89/01036; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of the antibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entire heavy or light chain.
[0136] The expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce an antibody for use in the methods described herein. Thus, the invention includes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, operably linked to a heterologous promoter. In preferred embodiments for the expression of double-chained antibodies, vectors encoding both the heavy and light chains may be co- expressed in the host cell for expression of the entire immunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below.
[0137] A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express antibody molecules for use in the methods described herein. Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ. These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichiά) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS, CHO, BLK, 293, 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter). Preferably, bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, and more preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of a recombinant antibody molecule. For example, mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from
- 36 -
human cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies (Foecking ei al, Gene 45:101 (1986); Cockett et al, Bio/Technology 8:2 (1990)).
[0138] In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody molecule being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, for the generation of pharmaceutical compositions of an antibody molecule, vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al, EMBO J. 2:1791 (1983)), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lacZ coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res. 75:3101-3109 (1985); Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 24:5503-5509 (1989)); and the like. pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to a matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.
[0139] In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is typically used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. The antibody coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter).
[0140] In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome {e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl Acad. ScL USA 81:355-359 (1984)). Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety
- 37 -
of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bittner et at, Methods in Enzymol. /53:51-544 (1987)).
[0141] In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end, eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used. Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERY, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell line such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.
[0142] For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule may be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker. Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule.
[0143] A number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et ah, Cell JJ.-223 (1977)), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, Proa Natl. Acad. ScL USA 48:202 (1992)), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et ah, Cell 22:%\1 1980) genes can be employed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt-cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et ah, Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 77:357 (1980); O'Hare et ah, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1527
- 38 -
(1981)); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. USA 78:2072 (1981)); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G-418 Clinical Pharmacy /2:488-505; Wu and Wu, Biotherapy 3:87-95 (1991); Tolstoshev, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596 (1993); Mulligan, Science 260:926-932 (1993); and Morgan and Anderson, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 52:191-217 (1993);, TIB TECH 11(5): 155-215 (May, 1993); and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et ah, Gene 30:147 (1984). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology which can be used are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY (1993); Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY (1990); and in Chapters 12 and 13, Dracopoli et al (eds), Current Protocols in Human Genetics, John Wiley & Sons, NY (1994); Colberre-Garapin et al., J. MoI. Biol. 150:1 (1981), which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. [0144] The expression levels of an antibody molecule can be increased by vector amplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Academic Press, New York, Vol. 3. (1987)). When a marker in the vector system expressing antibody is amplifiable, increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture of host cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Since the amplified region is associated with the antibody gene, production of the antibody will also increase (Crouse et al., MoI. Cell. Biol. 3:257 (1983)).
[0145] The host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of the invention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide. The two vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides. Alternatively, a single vector may be used which encodes both heavy and light chain polypeptides. In such situations, the light chain is advantageously placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (Proudfoot, Nature 322:52 (1986); Kohler, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set. USA 77:2197 (1980)). The coding sequences for the heavy and light chains may comprise cDNA or genomic DNA.
[0146] Once an antibody molecule of the invention has been recombinantly expressed, it may be purified by any method known in the art for purification of an immunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g. , ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.
- 39 -
Alternatively, a preferred method for increasing the affinity of antibodies of the invention is disclosed in US 2002 0123057 Al.
[0147] In one embodiment, a binding molecule or antigen binding molecule for use in the methods of the invention comprises a synthetic constant region wherein one or more domains are partially or entirely deleted ("domain-deleted antibodies"). In certain embodiments compatible modified antibodies will comprise domain deleted constructs or variants wherein the entire CH2 domain has been removed (ΔCH2 constructs). For other embodiments a short connecting peptide may be substituted for the deleted domain to provide flexibility and freedom of movement for the variable region. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that such constructs are particularly preferred due to the regulatory properties of the CH2 domain on the catabolic rate of the antibody.
[0148J In certain embodiments, modified antibodies for use in the methods disclosed herein are minibodies. Minibodies can be made using methods described in the art (see, e.g., US patent 5,837,821 or WO 94/09817A1).
[0149] In another embodiment, modified antibodies for use in the methods disclosed herein are CH2 domain deleted antibodies which are known in the art. Domain deleted constructs can be derived using a vector (e.g., from Bio gen IDEC Incorporated) encoding an IgGi human constant domain (see, e.g., WO 02/060955A2 and WO02/096948A2). This exemplary vector was engineered to delete the CH2 domain and provide a synthetic vector expressing a domain deleted IgGi constant region.
[0150] In one embodiment, a NgRl antagonist antibody or fragment thereof for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein comprises an immunoglobulin heavy chain having deletion or substitution of a few or even a single amino acid as long as it permits association between the monomeric subunits. For example, the mutation of a single amino acid in selected areas of the CH2 domain may be enough to substantially reduce Fc binding and thereby increase tumor localization. Similarly, it may be desirable to simply delete that part of one or more constant region domains that control the effector function (e.g. complement binding) to be modulated. Such partial deletions of the constant regions may improve selected characteristics of the antibody (serum half-life) while leaving other desirable functions associated with the subject constant region domain intact. Moreover, as alluded to above, the constant regions of the disclosed antibodies may be synthetic through the mutation or substitution of one or more amino acids that enhances the profile of the resulting construct. In this respect it may be possible to disrupt the activity provided by a conserved binding site (e.g. Fc binding) while
- 40 -
substantially maintaining the configuration and immunogenic profile of the modified antibody.
Yet other embodiments comprise the addition of one or more amino acids to the constant region to enhance desirable characteristics such as effector function or provide for more cytotoxin or carbohydrate attachment. In such embodiments it may be desirable to insert or replicate specific sequences derived from selected constant region domains. [0151] The present invention also provides the use of antibodies that comprise, consist essentially of, or consist of, variants (including derivatives) of antibody molecules (e.g., the VH regions and/or VL regions) described herein, which antibodies or fragments thereof immunospecifically bind to a polypeptide. Standard techniques known to those of skill in the art can be used to introduce mutations in the nucleotide sequence encoding a binding molecule, including, but not limited to, site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis which result in amino acid substitutions. Preferably, the variants (including derivatives) encode less than 50 amino acid substitutions, less than 40 amino acid substitutions, less than 30 amino acid substitutions, less than 25 amino acid substitutions, less than 20 amino acid substitutions, less than 15 amino acid substitutions, less than 10 amino acid substitutions, less than 5 amino acid substitutions, less than 4 amino acid substitutions, less than 3 amino acid substitutions, or less than 2 amino acid substitutions relative to the reference VH region, VHCDRI, VHCDR2, VHCDR3, VL region, VLCDR1, VLCDR2, or VLCDR3. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a side chain with a similar charge. Families of amino acid residues having side chains with similar charges have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Alternatively, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of the coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity.
[0152] For example, it is possible to introduce mutations only in framework regions or only in CDR regions of an antibody molecule. Introduced mutations may be silent or neutral missense mutations, i.e., have no, or little, effect on an antibody's ability to bind antigen. These types of mutations may be useful to optimize codon usage, or improve a hybridoma's antibody production. Alternatively, non-neutral missense mutations may alter an antibody's
- 41 -
ability to bind antigen. The location of most silent and neutral missense mutations is likely to be in the framework regions, while the location of most non-neutral missense mutations is likely to be in CDR, though this is not an absolute requirement. One of skill in the art would be able to design and test mutant molecules with desired properties such as no alteration in antigen binding activity or alteration in binding activity (e.g., improvements in antigen binding activity or change in antibody specificity). Following mutagenesis, the encoded protein may routinely be expressed and the functional and/or biological activity of the encoded protein can be determined using techniques described herein or by routinely modifying techniques known in the art.
Fusion Proteins and Conjugated Polypeptides and Antibodies
[0153] NgRl polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein may further be recombinantly fused to a heterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemically conjugated (including covalent and non-covalent conjugations) to polypeptides or other compositions. For example, NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to molecules useful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such as heterologous polypeptides, drugs, radionuclides, or toxins. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Patent No. 5,314,995; and EP 396,387.
[0154] NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein include derivatives that are modified, i.e., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule such that covalent attachment does not prevent the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, or antibody from inhibiting the biological function of NgRl. For example, but not by way of limitation, the NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies of the present invention may be modified e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non- classical amino acids.
[0155] NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies for use in the treatment methods disclosed herein can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other
- 42 -
than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids. NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies may be modified by natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the antagonist polypeptide or antibody, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini, or on moieties such as carbohydrates. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Also, a given NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody may contain many types of modifications. NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers and antibodies may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, . methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination. (See, for instance, Proteins - Structure And Molecular Properties, T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York 2nd Ed., (1993); Posttranslational Covalent Modification Of Proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York, pgs. 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al, Meth Enzymol 182:626-646 (1990); Rattan et al, Ann NY Acad Sd 663:48-62 (1992)).
[0156] The heterologous polypeptide to which the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is fused is useful for function or is useful to target the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. NgRl antagonist fusion proteins, aptamers and antibodies can be used to accomplish various objectives, e.g., increased serum half-life, improved bioavailability, in vivo targeting to a specific organ or tissue type, improved recombinant expression efficiency, improved host cell secretion, ease of purification, and higher avidity. Depending on the objective(s) to be achieved, the heterologous moiety can be inert or biologically active. Also,
- 43 -
it can be chosen to be stably fused to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody or to be cleavable, in vitro or in vivo. Heterologous moieties to accomplish these other objectives are known in the art.
[0157] As an alternative to expression of an NgRl antagonist fusion polypeptide, aptamer or antibody, a chosen heterologous moiety can be preformed and chemically conjugated to the antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. In most cases, a chosen heterologous moiety will function similarly, whether fused or conjugated to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Therefore, in the following discussion of heterologous amino acid sequences, unless otherwise noted, it is to be understood that the heterologous sequence can be joined to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody in the form of a fusion protein or as a chemical conjugate.
[0158] Pharmacologically active polypeptides such as NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies often exhibit rapid in vivo clearance, necessitating large doses to achieve therapeutically effective concentrations in the body. In addition, polypeptides smaller than about 60 kDa potentially undergo glomerular filtration, which sometimes leads to nephrotoxicity. Fusion or conjugation of relatively small polypeptides such as NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies can be employed to reduce or avoid the risk of such nephrotoxicity. Various heterologous amino acid sequences, i.e., polypeptide moieties or "carriers," for increasing the in vivo stability, i.e., serum half-life, of therapeutic polypeptides are known.
[0159] Due to its long half-life, wide in vivo distribution, and lack of enzymatic or immunological function, essentially full-length human serum albumin (HSA), or an HSA fragment, is commonly used as a heterologous moiety. Through application of methods and materials such as those taught in Yeh et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 89: 1904-08 (1992) and Syed et al, Blood 5P:3243-52 (1997), HSA can be used to form an NgRl antagonist fusion polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or polypeptide/antibody conjugate that displays pharmacological activity by virtue of the moiety while displaying significantly increased in vivo stability, e.g., 10- fold to 100-fold higher. The C-terminus of the HSA can be fused to the N-terminus of the soluble moiety. Since HSA is a naturally secreted protein, the HSA signal sequence can be exploited to obtain secretion of the soluble fusion protein into the cell culture medium when the fusion protein is produced in a eukaryotic, e.g., mammalian, expression system.
[0160] In certain embodiments, NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, antibodies and antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention further comprise a
- 44 -
targeting moiety. Targeting moieties include a protein or a peptide which directs localization to a certain part of the body, for example, to the brain or compartments therein. In certain embodiments, NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers, antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention are attached or fused to a brain targeting moiety. The brain targeting moieties are attached covalently (e.g., direct, translational fusion, or by chemical linkage either directly or through a spacer molecule, which can be optionally cleavable) or non-covalently attached (e.g., through reversible interactions such as avidin, biotin, protein A5 IgG, etc.). In other embodiments, the NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamers," antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention thereof are attached to one more brain targeting moieties. In additional embodiments, the brain targeting moiety is attached to a plurality of NgRl antagonist polypeptides, aptamersb antibodies or antibody fragments thereof for use in the methods of the present invention.
[0161] A brain targeting moiety associated with an NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof enhances brain delivery of such an NgRl antagonist polypeptide, antibody or antibody fragment thereof. A number of polypeptides have been described which, when fused to a protein or therapeutic agent, delivers the protein or therapeutic agent through the blood brain barrier (BBB). Non-limiting examples include the single domain antibody FC5 (Abulrob et al. (2005) J. Neurochem. 95, 1201-1214); mAB 83- 14, a monoclonal antibody to the human insulin receptor (Pardridge et al. (1995) Pharmacol. Res. 12, 807-816); the B2, B6 and B8 peptides binding to the human transferrin receptor (hTfR) (Xia et al. (2000) J. Virol. 74, 11359-11366); the OX26 monoclona 1 antibody to the transferrin receptor (Pardridge et al. (1991) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 259, 66-70); and SEQ ID NOs: 1-18 of U.S. Patent No. 6,306,365. The contents of the above references are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
[0162] Enhanced brain delivery of an NgRl composition is determined by a number of means well established in the art. For example, administering to an animal a radioactively labelled NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof linked to a brain targeting moiety; determining brain localization; and comparing localization with an equivalent radioactively labelled NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer, antibody or antibody fragment thereof that is not associated with a brain targeting moiety. Other means of determining enhanced targeting are described in the above references.
[0163] The signal sequence is a polynucleotide that encodes an amino acid sequence that initiates transport of a protein across the membrane of the endoplasmic reticulum. Signal
- 45 -
sequences useful for constructing an immunofusin include antibody light chain signal sequences, e.g., antibody 14.18 (Gillies et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 125:191-202 (1989)), antibody heavy chain signal sequences, e.g., the MOPC141 antibody heavy chain signal sequence (Sakano et al., Nature 286:5114 (1980)). Alternatively, other signal sequences can be used. See, e.g., Watson, Nucl. Acids Res. 72:5145 (1984). The signal peptide is usually cleaved in the lumen of the endoplasmic reticulum by signal peptidases. This results in the secretion of an immunofusin protein containing the Fc region and the soluble NgRl moiety. [0164] In some embodiments, the DNA sequence may encode a proteolytic cleavage site between the secretion cassette and the soluble NgRl moiety. Such a cleavage site may provide, e.g., for the proteolytic cleavage of the encoded fusion protein, thus separating the Fc domain from the target protein. Useful proteolytic cleavage sites include amino acid sequences recognized by proteolytic enzymes such as trypsin, plasmin, thrombin, factor Xa, or enterokinase K.
[0165] The secretion cassette can be incorporated into a replicable expression vector. Useful vectors include linear nucleic acids, plasmids, phagemids, cosmids and the like. An exemplary expression vector is pdC, in which the transcription of the immunofusin DNA is placed under the control of the enhancer and promoter of the human cytomegalovirus. See, e.g., Lo et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1088:112 (1991); and Lo et al., Protein Engineering ϋ:495-500 (1998). An appropriate host cell can be transformed or transfected with a DNA that encodes a soluble polypeptide and used for the expression and secretion of the soluble NgRl polypeptide. Host cells that are typically used include immortal hybridoma cells, myeloma cells, 293 cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, HeLa cells, and COS cells. [0166] In one embodiment, a soluble NgRl polypeptide is fused to a hinge and Fc region, i.e., the C-terminal portion of an Ig heavy chain constant region. Potential advantages of an NgRl-Fc fusion include solubility, in vivo stability, and multivalency, e.g., dimerization. The Fc region used can be an IgA, IgD, or IgG Fc region (hinge- CH2- CH3). Alternatively, it can be an IgE or IgM Fc region (hinge- CH2- CH3-CH4). An IgG Fc region is generally used, e.g., an IgGi Fc region or IgG4 Fc region. In one embodiment, a sequence beginning in the hinge region just upstream of the papain cleavage site which defines IgG Fc chemically (i.e. residue 216, taking the first residue of heavy chain constant region to be 114 according to the Kabat system), or analogous sites of other immunoglobulins is used in the fusion. The precise site at which the fusion is made is not critical; particular sites are well known and may be selected in order to optimize the biological activity, secretion, or binding characteristics of the molecule. Materials and methods for constructing and expressing DNA encoding Fc fusions are known in
- 46 -
the art and can be applied to obtain soluble NgRl fusions without undue experimentation. Some embodiments of the invention employ an NgRl fusion protein such as those described in Capon et al, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,428,130 and 5,565,335.
[0167] Fully intact, wild-type Fc regions display effector functions that normally are unnecessary and undesired in an Fc fusion protein used in the methods of the present invention. Therefore, certain binding sites typically are deleted from the Fc region during the construction of the secretion cassette. For example, since coexpression with the light chain is unnecessary, the binding site for the heavy chain binding protein, Bip (Hendershot et al., Immunol. Today 5:111-14 (1987)), is deleted from the CH2 domain of the Fc region of IgE, such that this site does not interfere with the efficient secretion of the immunofusin. Transmembrane domain sequences, such as those present in IgM, also are generally deleted.
[0168] The IgG1 Fc region is most often used. Alternatively, the Fc region of the other subclasses of immunoglobulin gamma (gamma-2, gamma-3 and gamma-4) can be used in the secretion cassette. The IgG1 Fc region of immunoglobulin gamma- 1 is generally used in the secretion cassette and includes at least part of the hinge region, the CH2 region, and the CH3 region. In some embodiments, the Fc region of immunoglobulin gamma- 1 is a Cκ2-deleted- Fc, which includes part of the hinge region and the CH3 region, but not the CH2 region. A CH2- deleted-Fc has been described by Gillies et al., Hum. Antibod. Hybridomas 1:47 (1990). In some embodiments, the Fc region of one of IgA, IgD, IgE, or IgM, is used. [0169] NgRl-Fc fusion proteins can be constructed in several different configurations. In one configuration the C-terminus of the soluble NgRl moiety is fused directly to the N- terminus of the Fc hinge moiety. In a slightly different configuration, a short polypeptide, e.g. , 2-10 amino acids, is incorporated into the fusion between the N-terminus of the soluble NgRl moiety and the C-terminus of the Fc moiety. In the alternative configuration, the short polypeptide is incorporated into the fusion between the C-terminus of the NgR polypeptide moiety and the N-terminus of the Fc moiety. Such a linker provides conformational flexibility, which may improve biological activity in some circumstances. If a sufficient portion of the hinge region is retained in the Fc moiety, the NgRl-Fc fusion will dimerize, thus forming a divalent molecule. A homogeneous population of monomelic Fc fusions will yield monospecific, bivalent dimers. A mixture of two monomelic Fc fusions each having a different specificity will yield bispecific, bivalent dimers.
[0170] Any of a number of cross- linkers that contain a corresponding amino-reactive group and thiol-reactive group can be used to link NgRl antagonist polypeptides to serum albumin. Examples of suitable linkers include amine reactive cross-linkers that insert a thiol-reactive
- 47 -
maleimide, e.g., SMCC, AMAS, BMPS, MBS3 EMCS, SMPB5 SMPH, KMUS, and GMBS. Other suitable linkers insert a thiol-reactive haloacetate group, e.g., SBAP, SIA, SIAB. Linkers that provide a protected or non-protected thiol for reaction with sulfhydryl groups to product a reducible linkage include SPDP, SMPT, SATA, and SATP. Such reagents are commercially available (e.g., Pierce Chemicals).
[0171] Conjugation does not have to involve the N-terminus of a soluble polypeptide or the thiol moiety on serum albumin. For example, soluble NgRl -albumin fusions can be obtained using genetic engineering techniques, wherein the soluble NgRl moiety is fused to the serum albumin gene at its N-terminus, C-terminus, or both.
[0172] Soluble NgRl polypeptides can be fused to heterologous peptides to facilitate purification or identification of the soluble NgRl moiety. For example, a histidine tag can be fused to a soluble NgRl polypeptide to facilitate purification using commercially available chromatography media.
[0173] In some embodiments of the invention, a soluble NgRl fusion construct is used to enhance the production of a soluble NgRl moiety in bacteria. In such constructs a bacterial protein normally expressed and/or secreted at a high level is employed as the N-terminal fusion partner of a soluble polypeptide. See, e.g., Smith et at, Gene 67:31 (1988); Hopp et at, Biotechnology 6:1204 (1988); LaVaIHe et at, Biotechnology 7/:187 (1993). [0174] By fusing a soluble NgRl moiety at the amino and carboxy termini of a suitable fusion partner, bivalent or tetravalent forms of a soluble NgRl polypeptide can be obtained. For example, a soluble NgRl moiety can be fused to the amino and carboxy termini of an Ig moiety to produce a bivalent monomeric polypeptide containing two soluble NgRl moieties. Upon dimerization of two of these monomers, by virtue of the Ig moiety, a tetravalent form of a soluble NgRl protein is obtained. Such multivalent forms can be used to achieve increased binding affinity for the target. Multivalent forms of soluble NgRl also can be obtained by placing soluble NgRl moieties in tandem to form concatamers, which can be employed alone or fused to a fusion partner such as Ig or HSA.
Conjugated Polymers (other than polypeptides)
[017S] Some embodiments of the invention involve a soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl aptamer or NgRl antibody wherein one or more polymers are conjugated (covalently linked) to the NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody for use in the methods of the present invention. Examples of polymers suitable for such conjugation include polypeptides (discussed above), aptamers, sugar polymers and polyalkylene glycol chains. Typically, but not necessarily, a
- 48 -
polymer is conjugated to the soluble NgRl polypeptide or NgRl antibody for the purpose of improving one or more of the following: solubility, stability, or bioavailability. [0176] The class of polymer generally used for conjugation to a NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is a polyalkylene glycol. Polyethylene glycol (PEG) is most frequently used. PEG moieties, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 PEG polymers, can be conjugated to each NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody to increase serum half life, as compared to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody alone. PEG moieties are non-antigenic and essentially biologically inert. PEG moieties used in the practice of the invention may be branched or unbranched.
[0177] The number of PEG moieties attached to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody and the molecular weight of the individual PEG chains can vary. In general, the higher the molecular weight of the polymer, the fewer polymer chains attached to the polypeptide. Usually, the total polymer mass attached to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is from. 20 kDa to 40 kDa. Thus, if one polymer chain is attached, the molecular weight of the chain is generally 20-40 kDa. If two chains are attached, the molecular weight of each chain is generally 10-20 kDa. If three chains are attached, the molecular weight is generally 7-14 kDa.
[0178] The polymer, e.g., PEG, can be linked to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody through any suitable, exposed reactive group on the polypeptide. The exposed reactive group(s) can be, e.g., an N-terminal amino group or the epsilon amino group of an internal lysine residue, or both. An activated polymer can react and covalently link at any free amino group on the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Free carboxylic groups, suitably activated carbonyl groups, hydroxyl, guanidyl, imidazole, oxidized carbohydrate moieties and mercapto groups of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody (if available) also can be used as reactive groups for polymer attachment. [0179] In a conjugation reaction, from about 1.0 to about 10 moles of activated polymer per mole of polypeptide, depending on polypeptide concentration, is typically employed. Usually, the ratio chosen represents a balance between maximizing the reaction while minimizing side reactions (often non-specific) that can impair the desired pharmacological activity of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Preferably, at least 50% of the biological activity (as demonstrated, e.g., in any of the assays described herein or known in the art) of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is retained, and most preferably nearly 100% is retained.
- 49 -
[0180] The polymer can be conjugated to the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody using conventional chemistry. For example, a polyalkylene glycol moiety can be coupled to a lysine epsilon amino group of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide or antibody. Linkage to the lysine side chain can be performed with an N-hydroxylsuccinimide (NHS) active ester such as PEG succinimidyl succinate (SS-PEG) and succinimidyl propionate (SPA- PEG). Suitable polyalkylene glycol moieties include, e.g., carboxymethyl-NHS and norleucine-NHS, SC. These reagents are commercially available. Additional amine-reactive PEG linkers can be substituted for the succinimidyl moiety. These include, e.g., isothiocyanates, nitrophenylcarbonates (PNP), epoxides, benzotriazole carbonates, SC-PEG, tresylate, aldehyde, epoxide, carbonylimidazole and PNP carbonate. Conditions are usually optimized to maximize the selectivity and extent of reaction. Such optimization of reaction conditions is within ordinary skill in the art.
[0181] PEGylation can be carried out by any of the PEGylation reactions known in the art. See, e.g., Focus on Growth Factors 3:4-10 (1992), and European patent applications EP 0 154 316 and EP 0 401 384. PEGylation may be carried out using an acylation reaction or an alkylation reaction with a reactive polyethylene glycol molecule (or an analogous reactive water-soluble polymer).
[0182] PEGylation by acylation generally involves reacting an active ester derivative of polyethylene glycol. Any reactive PEG molecule can be employed in the PEGylation. PEG esterifϊed to N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) is a frequently used activated PEG ester. As used herein, "acylation" includes without limitation the following types of linkages between the therapeutic protein and a water-soluble polymer such as PEG: amide, carbamate, urethane, and the like. See, e.g., Bioconjugate Chem_. 5:133-140, 1994. Reaction parameters are generally selected to avoid temperature, solvent, and pH conditions that would damage or inactivate the soluble polypeptide.
[0183] Generally, the connecting linkage is an amide and typically at least 95% of the resulting product is mono-, di- or tri-PEGylated. However, some species with higher degrees of PEGylation may be formed in amounts depending on the specific reaction conditions used. Optionally, purified PEGylated species are separated from the mixture, particularly unreacted species, by conventional purification methods, including, e.g., dialysis, salting-out, ultrafiltration, ion-exchange chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, hydrophobic exchange chromatography, and electrophoresis.
[0184] PEGylation by alkylation generally involves reacting a terminal aldehyde derivative of PEG with NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody in the presence of a reducing
- 50 -
agent. In addition, one can manipulate the reaction conditions to favor PEGylation substantially only at the- N-terminal amino group of NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody, i.e. a mono-PEGylated protein. In either case of mono-PEGylation or poly- PEGylatioπ, the PEG groups are typically attached to the protein via a - CH2-NH- group. With particular reference to the - CH2- group, this type of linkage is known as an "alkyl" linkage. [0185] Derivatization via reductive alkylation to produce an N-terminally targeted mono- PEGylated product exploits differential reactivity of different types of primary amino groups (lysine versus the N-terminal) available for derivatization. The reaction is performed at a pH that allows one to take advantage of the pKa differences between the epsilon-amino groups of the lysine residues and that of the N-terminal amino group of the protein. By such selective derivatization, attachment of a water-soluble polymer that contains a reactive group, such as an aldehyde, to a protein is controlled: the conjugation with the polymer takes place predominantly at the N-terminus of the protein and no significant modification of other reactive groups, such as the lysine side chain amino groups, occurs.
[0186] The polymer molecules used in both the acylation and alkylation approaches are selected from among water-soluble polymers. The polymer selected is typically modified to have a single reactive group, such as an active ester for acylation or an aldehyde for alkylation, so that the degree of polymerization may be controlled as provided for in the present methods. An exemplary reactive PEG aldehyde is polyethylene glycol propionaldehyde, which is water stable, or mono Cl-ClO alkoxy or aryloxy derivatives thereof (see, e.g., Harris et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,714). The polymer may be branched or unbranched. For the acylation reactions, the polymer(s) selected typically have a single reactive ester group. For reductive alkylation, the polymer(s) selected typically have a single reactive aldehyde group. Generally, the water- soluble polymer will not be selected from naturally occurring glycosyl residues, because these are usually made more conveniently by mammalian recombinant expression systems. [0187] Methods for preparing a PEGylated soluble NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody generally includes the steps of (a) reacting a NgRl antagonist polypeptide or antibody with polyethylene glycol (such as a reactive ester or aldehyde derivative of PEG) under conditions whereby the molecule becomes attached to one or more PEG groups, and (b) obtaining the reaction product(s). In general, the optimal reaction conditions for the acylation reactions will be determined case-by-case based on known parameters and the desired result. For example, a larger ratio of PEG to protein generally leads to a greater the percentage of poly-PEGylated product.
- 51 -
[0188] Reductive alkylation to produce a substantially homogeneous population of mono- polymer/soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl aptamer or NgRl antibody generally includes the steps of: (a) reacting a soluble NgRl protein or polypeptide with a reactive PEG molecule under reductive alkylation conditions, at a pH suitable to permit selective modification of the N-terminal amino group of the polypeptide or antibody; and (b) obtaining the reaction produces).
[0189] For a substantially homogeneous population of mono-polymer/soluble NgRl polypeptide, NgRl aptamer or NgRl antibody, the reductive alkylation reaction conditions are those that permit the selective attachment of the water-soluble polymer moiety to the N- terminus of the polypeptide or antibody. Such reaction conditions generally provide for pKa differences between the lysine side chain amino groups and the N-terminal amino group. For purposes of the present invention, the pH is generally in the range of 3-9, typically 3-6. [0190] Soluble NgRl polypeptides, aptamers or antibodies can include a tag, e.g., a moiety that can be subsequently released by proteolysis. Thus, the lysine moiety can be selectively modified by first reacting a His-tag modified with a low-molecular-weight linker such as Traut's reagent (Pierce) which will react with both the lysine and N-terminus, and then releasing the His tag. The polypeptide will then contain a free SH group that can be selectively modified with a PEG containing a thiol-reactive head group such as a maleimide group, a vinylsulfone group, a haloacetate group, or a free or protected SH.
[0191] Traut's reagent can be replaced with any linker that will set up a specific site for PEG attachment. For example, Traut's reagent can be replaced with SPDP, SMPT, SATA, or SATP (Pierce). Similarly, one could react the protein with an amine-reactive linker that inserts a maleimide (for example SMCC, AMAS, BMPS, MBS, EMCS, SMPB, SMPH, KMUS, or GMBS), a haloacetate group (SBAP, SIA, SIAB), or a vinylsulfone group and react the resulting product with a PEG that contains a free SH.
[0192] In some embodiments, the polyalkylene glycol moiety is coupled to a cysteine group of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide, aptamer or antibody. Coupling can be effected using, e.g., a maleimide group, a vinylsulfone group, a haloacetate group, or a thiol group. [0193] Optionally, the soluble NgRl polypeptide, aptamer or antibody is conjugated to the polyethylene-glycol moiety through a labile bond. The labile bond can be .cleaved in, e.g., biochemical hydrolysis, proteolysis, or sulfhydryl cleavage. For example, the bond can be cleaved under in vivo (physiological) conditions.
[0194] The reactions may take place by any suitable method used for reacting biologically active materials with inert polymers, generally at about pH 5-8, e.g., pH 5, 6, 7, or 8, if the
- 52 -
reactive groups are on the alpha amino group at the N-terminus. Generally the process involves preparing an activated polymer and thereafter reacting the protein with the activated polymer to produce the soluble protein suitable for formulation.
NgRl Polynucleotide Antagonists
[0195] Specific embodiments comprise a method of treating a demyelination or dysmyelination disorder, comprising administering an effective amount of an polynucleotide antagonist which comprises a nucleic acid molecule which specifically binds to a polynucleotide which encodes NgRl. The NgRl polynucleotide antagonist prevents expression of NgRl (knockdown). NgRl polynucleotide antagonists include, but are not limited to antisense molecules, ribozymes, siRNA, shRNA and RNAi. Typically, such binding molecules are separately administered to the animal (see, for example, O'Connor, J. Neurochem. 56:560 (1991), but such binding molecules may also be expressed in vivo from polynucleotides taken up by a host cell and expressed in vivo. See also Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). [0196] RNAi refers to the expression of an RNA which interferes with the expression of the targeted mRNA. Specifically, the RNAi silences a targeted gene via interacting with the specific mRNA (e.g.NgRl) through an siRNA (short interfering RNA). The ds RNA complex is then targeted for degradation by the cell. Additional RNAi molecules include short hairpin RNA (shRNA); also short interfering hairpin. The shRNA molecule contains sense and antisense sequences from a target gene connected by a loop. The shRNA is transported from the nucleus into the cytoplasm, it is degraded along with the mRNA. Pol III or U6 promoters can be used to express RNAs for RNAi.
[0197] RNAi is mediated by double stranded RNA (dsRNA) molecules that have sequence- specific homology to their "target" mRNAs (Caplen et al, Proc Natl Acad Sd USA 98:9742- 9747, 2001). Biochemical studies in Drosophila cell-free lysates indicates that the mediators of RNA-dependent gene silencing are 21-25 nucleotide "small interfering" RNA duplexes (siRNAs). Accordingly, siRNA molecules are advantageously used in the methods of the present invention. The siRNAs are derived from the processing of dsRNA by an RNase known as DICER (Bernstein et al, Nature 409:363-366, 2001). It appears that siRNA duplex products are recruited into a multi-protein siRNA complex termed RISC (RNA Induced Silencing Complex). Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that a RISC is guided .to a target mRNA, where the siRNA duplex interacts sequence-specifically to
- 53 -
mediate cleavage in a catalytic fashion (Bernstein et ah, Nature 409:363-366, 2001; Boutla et al., CurrBiol /7:1776-1780, 2001).
[0198] RNAi has been used to analyze gene function and to identify essential genes in mammalian cells (Elbashir et al, Methods 25:199-213, 2002; Harborth et al, J Cell Sci 114:4557-4565, 2001), including by way of non- limiting example neurons (Krichevsky et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 99:11926-11929, 2002). RNAi is also being evaluated for therapeutic modalities, such as inhibiting or blocking the infection, replication and/or growth of viruses, including without limitation poliovirus (Gitlin et al, Nature 418:379-380, 2002) and HIV (Capodicϊ et al, J Immunol 169:5196-5201, 2002), and reducing expression of oncogenes (e.g., the bcr-abl gene; Scherr et al, Blood 70/(4): 1566-9, 2002). RNAi has been used to modulate gene expression in mammalian (mouse) and amphibian (Xenopus) embryos (respectively, Calegari et al, Proc Natl Acad Sd USA 99: 14236- 14240, 2002; and Zhou, et al, Nucleic Acids Res 30:1664-1669, 2002), and in postnatal mice (Lewis et al., Nat Genet 52:107-108, 2002), and to reduce transgene expression in adult transgenic mice (McCaffrey et al, Nature 418:3%- 39, 2002). Methods have been described for determining the efficacy and specificity of siRNAs in cell culture and in vivo (see, e.g., Bertrand et al, Biochem Biophys Res Commun 2P5:1000-1004, 2002; Lassus et al, Sci STKE 2002(147) :PL13, 2002; and Leirdal et al, Biochem Biophys Res Commun 295:1 '44-7 '48, 2002).
[0199] Molecules that mediate RNAi, including without limitation siRNA, can be produced in vitro by chemical synthesis (Hohjoh, FEBS Lett 521 -.195-199, 2002), hydrolysis of dsRNA (Yang et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA PP: 9942-9947, 2002), by in vitro transcription with T7 RNA polymerase (Donzeet et al, Nucleic Acids Res 30:e46, 2002; Yu et al,,Proc Natl Acad Sci USA PP:6047-6052, 2002), and by hydrolysis of double-stranded RNA using a nuclease such as E. coli RNase III (Yang et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA PP:9942-9947, 2002). [0200] siRNA molecules may also be formed by annealing two oligonucleotides to each other, typically have the following general structure, which includes both double-stranded and single-stranded portions:
I -m— I ( Ove r hang )
I x 1 ( "Core" )
5 ' -XXXXSCXXXXiCXXNNNNN-S ' (SEQ ID NO : 14 )
3 ' -NNNNNY^fϊΥYYYYYYYY-5 ' ( SEQ ID NO : 15 ) I — n— I ( Overhang )
- 54 -
[0201] Wherein N, X and Y are nucleotides; X hydrogen bonds to Y; ":" signifies a hydrogen bond between two bases; x is a natural integer having a value between 1 and about 100; and m and n are whole integers having, independently, values between 0 and about 100. In some embodiments, N5 X and Y are independently A, G, C and T or U. Non-naturally occurring bases and nucleotides can be present, particularly in the case of synthetic siRNA (i.e., the product of annealing two oligonucleotides). The double-stranded central section is called the "core" and has base pairs (bp) as units of measurement; the single-stranded portions are overhangs, having nucleotides (nt) as units of measurement. The overhangs shown are 3 ' overhangs, but molecules with 5' overhangs are also within the scope of the invention. Also within the scope of the invention are siRNA molecules with no overhangs (i.e., m = 0 and n = 0), and those having an overhang on one side of the core but not the other (e.g., m — 0 and n > 1, or vice- versa).
[0202] Initially, JRNAi technology did not appear to be readily applicable to mammalian systems. This is because, in mammals, dsRNA activates dsRNA-activated protein kinase (PKR) resulting in an apoptotic cascade and cell death (Der et αl, Proc. Nαtl. Acαd. Sci. USA P4:3279-3283, 1997). In addition, it has long been known that dsRNA activates the interferon cascade in mammalian cells, which can also lead to altered cell physiology (Colby et αl, Annu. Rev. Microbiol. 25:333, 1971; Kleinschmidt et αl., Annu. Rev. Biochem. 41:511, 1972; Lampson et αl., Proc. Nαtl. Acαd. ScL USA 581ΩS2, 1967; Lomniczi et αl., J. Gen. Virol. 8:55, 1970; and Younger et αl., J. Bαcteriol. 92:862, 1966). However, dsRNA-mediated activation of the PKR and interferon cascades requires dsRNA longer than about 30 base pairs. In contrast, dsRNA less than 30 base pairs in length has been demonstrated to cause RNAi in mammalian cells (Caplen et αl., Proc. Nαtl. Acαd. Sci. USA 98:9742-9747, 2001). Thus, it is expected that undesirable, non-specific effects associated with longer dsRNA molecules can be avoided by preparing short RNA that is substantially free from longer dsRNAs. [0203] References regarding siRNA: Bernstein et αl., Nature 409:363-366, 2001; Boutla et al, Curr Biol 11: 1776-1780, 2001; Cullen, Nat Immunol. 3:597-599, 2002; Caplen et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 95:9742-9747, 2001; Hamilton et al., Science 286:950-952, 1999; Nagase et al, DNA Res. 6:63-70, 1999; Napoli et al, Plant Cell 2:279-289, 1990; Nicholson et al, Mamm. Genome 13:67-73, 2002; Parrish et al, MoI Cell (5:1077-1087, 2000; Romano et al, MoI Microbiol 5:3343-3353, 1992; Tabara et al, Cell 99: 123-132, 1999; and Tuschl, Chembiochem. 2:239-245, 2001.
[0204] Paddison et al (Genes & Dev. 75:948-958, 2002) have used small RNA molecules folded into hairpins as a means to effect RNAi. Accordingly, such short hairpin RNA (shRNA)
- 55 -
molecules are also advantageously used in the methods of the invention. The length of the stem and loop of functional shRNAs varies; stem lengths can range anywhere from about 25 to about 30 nt, and loop size can range between 4 to about 25 nt without affecting silencing activity. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that these shRNAs resemble the dsRNA products of the DICER RNase and, in any event, have the same capacity for inhibiting expression of a specific gene.
[0205] In some embodiments, the invention provides that that siRNA or the shRNA inhibits NgRl expression. In some embodiments, the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA is at least 80%, 90%, or 95% identical to the nucleotide sequence comprising: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12). In other embodiments, the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8) or CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
[0206] In some embodiments, the invention further provides that the siRNA or shRNA nucleotide sequence is complementary to the mRNA produced by the polynucleotide sequence GATGAAGAGGGCGTCC GCT (SEQ ID NO:9) or GGGCCTGGCTGCAGAAGTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) or GACTGGTGACTCAGAAGGC (SEQ ID NO: 13).
[0207] In some embodiments of the invention, the shRNA is expressed from a lentiviral vector.
[0208] Chemically synthesizing nucleic acid molecules with modifications (base, sugar and/or phosphate) can prevent their degradation by serum ribonucleases, which can increase their potency {see e.g., Eckstein et al, International Publication No. WO 92/07065; Perrault et al, Nature 344:565 (1990); Pieken et al., Science 253:314 (1991); Usman and Cedergren, Trends in Biochem. Sd. 17:334 (1992); Usman et al, International Publication No. WO 93/15187; and Rossi et al, International Publication No. WO 91/03162; Sproat, U.S. Pat. No. 5,334,711; Gold et al, U.S. Pat. No. 6,300,074; and Burgin et al, supra; all of which are incorporated by reference herein). All of the above references describe various chemical modifications that can be made to the base, phosphate and/or sugar moieties of the nucleic acid molecules described herein. Modifications that enhance their efficacy in cells, and removal of bases from nucleic acid molecules to shorten oligonucleotide synthesis times and reduce chemical requirements are desired.
[0209] There are several examples in the art describing sugar, base and phosphate modifications that can be introduced into nucleic acid molecules with significant enhancement
- 56 -
in their nuclease stability and efficacy. For example, oligonucleotides are modified to enhance stability and/or enhance biological activity by modification with nuclease resistant groups, for example, 2'-amino, 2'-C-allyl, 2'-flouro, 2'-O-methyl, 2'-O-allyl, 2'-H, nucleotide base modifications (for a review see Usman and Cedergren, TIBS. 17:34 (1992); Usman et al, Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 31:163 (1994); Burgin et al, Biochemistry 35:14090 (1996)). Sugar modification of nucleic acid molecules have been extensively described in the art (see Eckstein et al, International Publication PCT No. WO 92/07065; Perrault et al, Nature 344: 565-568 (1990); Pieken et al, Science 253: 314-317 (1991); Usman and Cedergren, Trends in Biochem. ScL 17: 334-339 (1992); Usman et al, International Publication PCT No. WO 93/15187; Sproat, U.S. Pat. No. 5,334,711 and Beigelman et al, J. Biol Chem. 270:25102 (1995); Beigelman et al, International PCT publication No. WO 97/26270; Beigelman et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,716,824; Usman et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,053; Woolf et al, International PCT Publication No. WO 98/13526; Karpeisky et al, 1998, Tetrahedron Lett. 39:1131 (1998); Earnshaw and Gait, Biopolymers (Nucleic Acid Sciences) 48:39-55 (1998); Verma and Eckstein, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 67:99-134 (1998); and Burlina et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. 5:1999-2010 (1997); all of the references are hereby incorporated in their totality by reference herein). Such publications describe general methods and strategies to determine the location of incorporation of sugar, base and/or phosphate modifications and the like into nucleic acid molecules without modulating catalysis, and are incorporated by reference herein. In view of such teachings, similar modifications can be used as described herein to modify the siRNA nucleic acid molecules of the instant invention so long as the ability of siRNA to promote RNAi is cells is not significantly inhibited.
[0210] The invention features modified siRNA molecules, with phosphate backbone modifications comprising one or more phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, methylphosphonate, phosphotriester, morpholino, amidate carbamate, carboxymethyl, acetamidate, polyamide, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfamate, formacetal, thioformacetal, and/or alkylsilyl, substitutions. For a review of oligonucleotide backbone modifications, see Hunziker and Leumann, Nucleic Acid Analogues: Synthesis and Properties, in Modern Synthetic Methods, VCH, 331-417 (1995), and Mesmaeker et al, Novel Backbone Replacements for Oligonucleotides, in Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research, ACS, 24-39 (1994). [0211] While chemical modification of oligonucleotide internucleotide linkages with phosphorothioate, phosphorothioate, and/or 5'-methylphosphonate linkages improves stability, excessive modifications can cause some toxicity or decreased activity. Therefore, when designing nucleic acid molecules, the amount of these internucleotide linkages should be
- 57 -
minimized. The reduction in the concentration of these linkages should lower toxicity, resulting in increased efficacy and higher specificity of these molecules.
[0212] siRNA molecules having chemical modifications that maintain or enhance activity are provided. Such a nucleic acid is also generally more resistant to nucleases than an unmodified nucleic acid. Accordingly, the in vitro and/or in vivo activity should not be significantly lowered. In cases in which modulation is the goal, therapeutic nucleic acid molecules delivered exogenously should optimally be stable within cells until translation of the target RNA has been modulated long enough to reduce the levels of the undesirable protein. This period of time varies between hours to days depending upon the disease state. Improvements in the chemical synthesis of RNA and DNA (Wincott et ah, Nucleic Acids Res. 23:2677 (1995); Caruthers et al, Methods in Enzymology 211:3-19 (1992) (incorporated by reference herein)) have expanded the ability to modify nucleic acid molecules by introducing nucleotide modifications to enhance their nuclease stability, as described above. [0213] Polynucleotides of the present invention can include one or more (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,.8, 9, 10, or more) G-clamp nucleotides. A G-clamp nucleotide is a modified cytosine analog wherein the modifications confer the ability to hydrogen bond both Watson-Crick and Hoogsteen faces of a complementary guanine within a duplex, see, e.g., Lin and Matteucci, J. Am. Chem. Soc. ./20:8531-8532 (1998). A single G-clamp analog substitution within an oligonucleotide can result in substantially enhanced helical thermal stability and mismatch discrimination when hybridized to complementary oligonucleotides. The inclusion of such nucleotides in polynucleotides of the invention results in both enhanced affinity and specificity to nucleic acid targets, complementary sequences, or template strands. Polynucleotides of the present invention can also include one or more (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more) LNA "locked nucleic acid" nucleotides such as a 2', 4'-C mythylene bicyclo nucleotide (see, e.g., Wengel et al.t International PCT Publication No. WO 00/66604 and WO 99/14226). [0214] The present invention also features conjugates and/or complexes of siRNA molecules of the invention. Such conjugates and/or complexes can be used to facilitate delivery of siRNA molecules into a biological system, such as a cell. The conjugates and complexes provided by the instant invention can impart therapeutic activity by transferring therapeutic compounds across cellular membranes, altering the pharmacokinetics, and/or modulating the localization of nucleic acid molecules of the invention. The present invention encompasses the design and synthesis of novel conjugates and complexes for the delivery of molecules, including, but not limited to, small molecules, lipids, phospholipids, nucleosides, nucleotides, nucleic acids, antibodies, toxins, negatively charged polymers and other polymers,
- 58 -
for example proteins, peptides, hormones, carbohydrates, polyethylene glycols, or polyamines, across cellular membranes. In general, the transporters described are designed to be used either individually or as part of a multi-component system, with or without degradable linkers. • These compounds are expected to improve delivery and/or localization of nucleic acid molecules of the invention into a number of cell types originating from different tissues, in the presence or absence of serum (see Sullenger and Cech, U.S. Pat. No. 5,854,038). Conjugates of the molecules described herein can be attached to biologically active molecules via linkers that are biodegradable, such as biodegradable nucleic acid linker molecules.
[0215] Therapeutic polynucleotides (e.g., siRNA molecules) delivered exogenously optimally are stable within cells until reverse transcription of the RNA has been modulated long enough to reduce the levels of the RNA transcript. The nucleic acid molecules are resistant to nucleases in order to function as effective intracellular therapeutic agents. Improvements in the chemical synthesis of nucleic acid molecules described in the instant invention and in the art have expanded the ability to modify nucleic acid molecules by introducing nucleotide modifications to enhance their nuclease stability as described above. [0216] The present invention also provides for siRNA molecules having chemical modifications that maintain or enhance enzymatic activity of proteins involved in RNAi. Such nucleic acids are also generally more resistant to nucleases than unmodified nucleic acids. Thus, in vitro and/or in vivo the activity should not be significantly lowered. [0217] Use of the polynucleoti de-based molecules of the invention will lead to better treatment of the disease progression by affording the possibility of combination therapies (e.g., multiple siRNA molecules targeted to different genes; nucleic acid molecules coupled with known small molecule modulators; or intermittent treatment with combinations of molecules, including different motifs and/or other chemical or biological molecules). The treatment of subjects with siRNA molecules can also include combinations of different types of nucleic acid molecules, such as enzymatic nucleic acid molecules (ribozymes), allozymes, antisense, 2,5-A oligoadenylate, decoys, aptamers etc.
[0218] In another aspect, a siRNA molecule of the invention can comprise one or more 5' and/or a 3 '-cap structures, for example on only the sense siRNA strand, antisense siRNA strand, or both siRNA strands. By "cap structure" is meant chemical modifications, which have been incorporated at either terminus of the oligonucleotide (see, for example, Adamic et ah, U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203, incorporated by reference herein). These terminal modifications protect the nucleic acid molecule from exonuclease degradation, and may help in delivery and/or localization within a cell. The cap may be present at the 5'-terminus (5'-cap) or at the 3'-
- 59 -
terniinal (3'-caρ) or may be present on both termini. In non-limiting examples: the 5'-cap is selected from the group comprising inverted abasic residue (moiety); 4',5'-methylene nucleotide; l-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4'-thio nucleotide; carbocyclic nucleotide; 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide; L-nucleotides; alpha-nucleotides; modified base nucleotide; phosphorodithioate linkage; threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide; acyclic 3',4'-seco nucleotide; acyclic 3,4-dihydroxybutyl nucleotide; acyclic 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, 3 '-3 '-inverted nucleotide moiety; 3'-3 '-inverted abasic moiety; 3'-2'-inverted nucleotide moiety; 3'-2'-inverted abasic moiety; 1,4-butanediol phosphate; 3'-phosphoramidate; hexylphosphate; aminohexyl phosphate; 3'-phosphate; 3'-phosphorothioate; phosphorodithioate; or bridging or non-bridging methylphosphonate moiety.
[0219] The 3'-cap can be selected from a group comprising, 4',5 '-methylene nucleotide; 1- (beta-D-erythromranosyl) nucleotide; 4'-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide; 5'-amino-alkyl phosphate; l,3-diamino-2-propyl phosphate; 3-aminoρropyl phosphate; 6-aminohexyl phosphate; 1,2-aminododecyl phosphate; hydroxypropyl phosphate; 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide; L-nucleotide; alpha-nucleotide; modified base nucleotide; phosphorodithioate; threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide; acyclic 3',4'-seco nucleotide; 3,4-dihydroxybutyl nucleotide; 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, 5 '-5 '-inverted nucleotide moiety; 5 '-5 '-inverted abasic moiety; 5 '-phosphor amidate; 5'-phosphorothioate; 1,4-butanediol phosphate; 5'-amino; bridging and/or non-bridging 5'-phosphoramidate, phosphorothioate and/or phosphorodithioate, bridging or non bridging methylphosphonate and 5'-mercapto moieties (for more details see Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron 49:1925 (1993); incorporated by reference herein).
[0220] Various modifications to nucleic acid siRNA structure can be made to enhance the utility of these molecules. Such modifications will enhance shelf-life, half-life in vitro, stability, and ease of introduction of such oligonucleotides to the target site, e.g., to enhance penetration of cellular membranes, and confer the ability to recognize and bind to targeted cells.
[0221] Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or through triple-helix formation. Antisense techniques are discussed for example, in Okano, J. Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 6:3013 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 257:1300 (1991). The methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA.
- 60 -
[0222] For example, the 5* coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes may be used to design an antisense BNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventing transcription and the production of the target protein. The antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into the target polypeptide.
[0223] In one embodiment, antisense nucleic acids, for use in the methods of the present invention, specific for the NgR gene are produced intracellularly by transcription from an exogenous sequence. For example, a vector or a portion thereof, is transcribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA). Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the desired antisense RNA. Such vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the antisense molecule, can be by any promoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells, such as those described elsewhere herein. [0224] Absolute complementarity of an antisense molecule, although preferred, is not required. A sequence complementary to at least a portion of an RNA encoding NgRl, means a sequence having sufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forming a stable duplex; or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability to hybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and the length of the antisense nucleic acid. Generally, the larger the hybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches it may contain and still form a stable duplex (or triplex as the case may be). One skilled in the art can ascertain a tolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determine the melting point of the hybridized complex.
[0225] Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of a messenger RNA, e.g., the 5' untranslated sequence up to and including the AUG initiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation. However, sequences complementary to the 3' untranslated sequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibiting translation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., Nature 372:333-335 (1994). Thus, oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'- non- translated, non-coding regions could be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of NgRl. Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5' untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUG start codon. Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be used in accordance with the invention. Antisense nucleic
- 61 -
acids should be at least six nucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, at least 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides. [0226] Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers described below, can be DNA or BLNA or chimeric mixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded or double-stranded. The oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stability of the molecule, hybridization, etc. The oligonucleotide may include other appended groups such as peptides {e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A. 86:6553-6556 (1989); Lemaitre et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL 84:648-652 (1987)); PCT Publication No. WO88/09810, published December 15, 1988) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO89/10134, published April 25, 1988), hybridization-triggered cleavage agents. (See, e.g., Rrol et al., BioTechniques 6:958-976 (1988)) or intercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549(1988)). To this end, the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.
[0227] Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers, may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to, 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5- carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N-6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine, 1- methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5- methylcytosine, N-6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5- methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5'methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio-N-6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine. 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4- thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5- methyl-2-thiouracil, 3(3-arnino-3-N2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. [0228] Polynucleotides for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, including aptamers may also comprise at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to, arabinose, 2-fiuoroarabinose. xylulose, and hexose.
- 62 -
[0229] In yet another embodiment, polynucleotides, including aptamers, for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein, comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including, but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof.
[0230] In yet another embodiment, an antisense oligonucleotide for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein is an α-anomeric oligonucleotide. An α-anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual situation, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625- 6641(1987)). The oligonucleotide is a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 75:6131-6148(1987)), or a chimeric KNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al, FEBS Lett. 2i5:327-330(1987)).
[0231] Polynucleotides, including aptamers, for use in the methods of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.). As examples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209 (1988), methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. U.S.A. 85:7448- 7451(1988)), etc.
[0232] Polynucleotide compositions for use in the therapeutic methods disclosed herein further include catalytic RNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO 90/11364, published October 4, 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247:1222-1225 (1990). The use of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleave mRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementary base pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the target mRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5'-UG-3'. The construction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in the art and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature 334:585-591 (1988). Preferably, the ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 51 end of the target mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize the intracellular accumulation of nonfunctional mRNA transcripts.
[0233] As in the antisense approach, ribozymes for use in the diagnostic and therapeutic methods disclosed herein can be composed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.) and may be delivered to cells which express in vivo. DNA constructs
- 63 -
encoding the ribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described above for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA. A preferred method of delivery involves using a DNA construct "encoding" the ribozyme under the control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, pol III or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will produce sufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymes unlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellular concentration is required for efficiency.
Aptamers
[0234] In another embodiment, the NgRl antagonist for use in the methods of the present invention is an aptamer. An aptamer can be a nucleotide or a polypeptide which has a unique sequence, has the property of binding specifically to a desired target (e.g., a polypeptide), and is a specific ligand of a given target. Nucleotide aptamers of the invention include double stranded DNA and single stranded RNA molecules that bind to NgRl.
[0235] Nucleic acid aptamers are selected using methods known in the art, for example via the Systematic Evolution of Ligands by Exponential Enrichment (SELEX) process. SELEX is a method for the in vitro evolution of nucleic acid molecules with highly specific binding to target molecules as described in e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,475,096, 5,580,737, 5,567,588, 5,707,796, 5,763,177, 6, 011,577, and 6,699,843, incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Another screening method to identify aptamers is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,163 (also incorporated herein by reference). The SELEX process is based on the capacity of nucleic acids for forming a variety of two- and three- dimensional structures, as well as the chemical versatility available within the nucleotide monomers to act as ligands (form specific binding pairs) with virtually any chemical compound, whether monomelic or polymeric, including other nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides. Molecules of any size or composition can serve as targets.
[0236] The SELEX method involves selection from a mixture of candidate oligonucleotides and step-wise iterations of binding, partitioning and amplification, using the same general selection scheme, to achieve desired binding affinity and selectivity. Starting from a mixture of nucleic acids, preferably comprising a segment of randomized sequence, the SELEX method includes steps of contacting the mixture with the target under conditions favorable for binding; partitioning unbound nucleic acids from those nucleic acids which have bound specifically to target molecules; dissociating the nucleic acid-target complexes; amplifying the nucleic acids dissociated from the nucleic acid-target complexes to yield a ligand enriched mixture of
- 64 -
nucleic acids. The steps of binding, partitioning, dissociating and amplifying are repeated through as many cycles as desired to yield highly specific high affinity nucleic acid ligaπds to the target molecule.
[0237] Nucleotide aptamers may be used, for example, as diagnostic tools or as specific inhibitors to dissect intracellular signaling and transport pathways (James (2001) Curr. Opin. Pharmacol. 1:540-546). The high affinity and specificity of nucleotide aptamers makes them good candidates for drug discovery. For example, aptamer antagonists to the toxin ricin have been isolated and have IC50 values in the nanomolar range (Hesselberth JR et al. (2000) J Biol Chem 275:4937-4942). Nucleotide aptamers may also be used against infectious disease, malignancy and viral surface proteins to reduce cellular infectivity.
[0238] Nucleotide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention may be modified (e.g., by modifying the backbone or bases or conjugated to peptides) as described herein for other polynucleotides.
[0239] Using the protein structure of NgRl, screening for aptamers that act on NgRl using the SELEX process would allow for the identification of aptamers that inhibit NgRl -mediated processes (e.g., NgRl -mediated inhibition of axonal regeneration).
[0240] Polypeptide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention are random peptides selected for their ability to bind to and thereby block the action of NgRl. Polypeptide aptamers may include a short variable peptide domain attached at both ends to a protein scaffold. This double structural constraint greatly increases the binding affinity of the peptide aptamer to levels comparable to an antibody's (nanomolar range). See, e.g., Hoppe-Seyler F et al. (2000) JMo/ Med 7S(8):426-430. The length of the short variable peptide is typically about 10 to 20 amino acids, and the scaffold may be any protein which has good solubility and compacity properties. One non-limiting example of a scaffold protein is the bacterial protein Thioredoxin-A. See, e.g., Cohen BA et al. (1998) PNAS 95(2A): 14272-14277. [0241] Polypeptide aptamers are peptides or small polypeptides that act as dominant inhibitors of protein function. Peptide aptamers specifically bind to target proteins, blocking their functional ability (Kolonin et al. (1998) Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL 95: 14,266-14,271). Peptide aptamers that bind with high affinity and specificity to a target protein can be isolated by a variety of techniques known in the art. Peptide aptamers can be isolated from random peptide libraries by yeast two-hybrid screens (Xu, C.W., et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 94: 12,473-12,478) or by ribosome display (Hanes et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 94:4937- 4942). They can also be isolated from phage libraries (Hoogenboom, H.R., et al. (1998) Immunotechnology 4: 1-20) or chemically generated peptide libraries. Additionally,
- 65 -
polypeptide aptamers may be selected using the selection of Ligand Regulated Peptide
Aptamers (LiRPAs). See, e.g., Binkowski BF et al, (2005) Chem & Biol 72(7): 847-855, incorporated herein by reference. Although the difficult means by which peptide aptamers are synthesized makes their use more complex than polynucleotide aptamers, they have unlimited chemical diversity. Polynucleotide aptamers are limited because they utilize only the four nucleotide bases, while peptide aptamers would have a much-expanded repertoire (i.e., 20 amino acids).
[0242] Peptide aptamers for use in the methods of the present invention may be modified (e.g., conjugated to polymers or fused to proteins) as described for other polypeptides elsewhere herein.
Vectors
[0243] Vectors comprising nucleic acids encoding NgRl antagonists may also be used to produce NgRl antagonists for use in the methods of the invention. The choice of vector and expression control sequences to which such nucleic acids are operably linked depends on the functional properties desired, e.g., protein expression, and the host cell to be transformed. [0244] Expression control elements useful for regulating the expression of an operably linked coding sequence are known in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, inducible promoters, constitutive promoters, secretion signals, and other regulatory elements. When an inducible promoter is used, it can be controlled, e.g., by a change in nutrient status, or a change in temperature, in the host cell medium.
[0245] The vector can include a prokaryotic replicon, i.e., a DNA sequence having the ability to direct autonomous replication and maintenance of the recombinant DNA molecule extra-chromosomally in a bacterial host cell. Such replicons are well known in the art. In addition, vectors that include a prokaryotic replicon may also include a gene whose expression confers a detectable marker such as a drug resistance. Examples of bacterial drug-resistance genes are those that confer resistance to ampicillin or tetracycline.
[0246] Vectors that include a prokaryotic replicon can also include a prokaryotic or bacteriophage promoter for directing expression of the coding gene sequences in a bacterial host cell. Promoter sequences compatible with bacterial hosts are typically provided in plasmid vectors containing convenient restriction sites for insertion of a DNA segment to be expressed. Examples of such plasmid vectors are pUC8, pUC9, pBR322 and pBR329 (BioRad® Laboratories), pPL and pKK223 (Pharmacia). Any suitable prokaryotic host can be
- 66 -
used to express a recombinant DNA molecule encoding a protein used in the methods of the invention.
[0247] For the purposes of this invention, numerous expression vector systems may be employed. For example, one class of vector utilizes DNA elements which are derived from animal viruses such as bovine papilloma virus, polyoma virus, adenovirus, vaccinia virus, baculovirus, retroviruses (RSV, MMTV or MOMLV) or SV40 virus. Others involve the use of polycistronic systems with internal ribosome binding sites. Additionally, cells which have integrated the DNA into their chromosomes may be selected by introducing one or more markers which allow selection of transfected host cells. The marker may provide for pro to trophy to an auxotrophic host, biocide resistance (e.g., antibiotics) or resistance to heavy metals such as copper. The selectable marker gene can either be directly linked to the DNA sequences to be expressed, or introduced into the same cell by cotransformation. The neomycin phosphotransferase (neo) gene is an example of a selectable marker gene (Southern et al, J. MoI. Anal. Genet. 7:327-341 (1982)). Additional elements may also be needed for optimal synthesis of mRNA. These elements may include signal sequences, splice signals, as well as transcriptional promoters, enhancers, and termination signals.
[0248] In one embodiment, a proprietary expression vector of Biogen IDEC, Inc., referred to as NEOSPLA (U.S. patent 6,159,730) may be used. This vector contains the cytomegalovirus promoter/enhancer, the mouse beta globin major promoter, the SV40 origin of replication, the bovine growth hormone polyadenylation sequence, neomycin phosphotransferase exon 1 and exon 2, the dihydrofolate reductase gene and leader sequence. This vector has been found to result in very high-level expression upon transfection in CHO cells, followed by selection in G418-containing medium and methotrexate amplification. Of course, any expression vector which is capable of eliciting expression in eukaryotic cells may be used in the present invention. Examples of suitable vectors include, but are not limited to plasmids pcDNA3, pHCMV/Zeo, pCR3.1, pEFl/His, pIND/GS, pRc/HCMV2, pSV40/Zeo2, pTRACER-HCMV, ρUB6/V5-His, pVAXl, and pZeoSV2 (available from Invitrogen, San Diego, CA), and plasmid pCI (available from Promega, Madison, WI). Additional eukaryotic cell expression vectors are known in the art and are commercially available. Typically, such vectors contain convenient restriction sites for insertion of the desired DNA segment. Exemplary vectors include pSVL and pKSV-10 (Pharmacia), pBPV-1, pml2d (International Biotechnologies), pTDTl (ATCC 31255), retroviral expression vector pMIG and pLL3.7, adenovirus shuttle vector pDC315, and AAV vectors. Other exemplary vector systems are disclosed e.g., in U.S. Patent 6,413,777.
- 67 -
[0249] In general, screening large numbers of transformed cells for those which express suitably high levels of the antagonist is routine experimentation which can be carried out, for example, by robotic systems.
[0250] Frequently used regulatory sequences for mammalian host cell expression include viral elements that direct high levels of protein expression in mammalian cells, such as promoters and enhancers derived from retroviral LTRs, cytomegalovirus (CMV) (such as the CMV promoter/enhancer), Simian Virus 40 (SV40) (such as the SV40 promoter/enhancer), adenovirus, (e.g., the adenovirus major late promoter (AdmlP)), polyoma and strong mammalian promoters such as native immunoglobulin and actin promoters. For further description of viral regulatory elements, and sequences thereof, see e.g., Stinski, U.S. Pat. No. 5,168,062; Bell, U.S. Pat. No. 4,510,245; and Schaffher, U.S. Pat. No. 4,968,615. [0251] The recombinant expression vectors may carry sequences that regulate replication of the vector in host cells (e.g., origins of replication) and selectable marker genes. The selectable marker gene facilitates selection of host cells into which the vector has been introduced (see, e.g., Axel, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,399,216; 4,634,665 and 5,179,017). For example, typically the selectable marker gene confers resistance to a drug, such as G418, hygromycin or methotrexate, on a host cell into which the vector has been introduced. Frequently used selectable marker genes include the dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene (for use in dhfr- host cells with methotrexate selection/amplification) and the neo gene (for G418 selection). [0252] Vectors encoding NgRl antagonists can be used for transformation of a suitable host cell. Transformation can be by any suitable method. Methods for introduction of exogenous DNA into mammalian cells are well known in the art and include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene-mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei. In addition, nucleic acid molecules may be introduced into mammalian cells by viral vectors.
[0253] Transformation of host cells can be accomplished by conventional methods suited to the vector and host cell employed. For transformation of prokaryotic host cells, electroporation and salt treatment methods can be employed (Cohen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 69:2110-14 (1972)). For transformation of vertebrate cells, electroporation, cationic lipid or salt treatment methods can be employed. See, e.g., Graham et al., Virology 52:456-467 (1973); Wigler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:1313-76 (1979).
[0254] The host cell line used for protein expression is most preferably of mammalian origin; those skilled in the art are credited with ability to preferentially determine particular
- 68 -
host cell lines which are best suited for the desired gene product to be expressed therein. Exemplary host cell lines include, but are not limited to NSO, SP2 cells, baby hamster kidney (BHK) cells, monkey kidney cells (COS), human hepatocellular carcinoma cells {e.g., Hep G2), A549 cells DG44 and DUXBIl (Chinese Hamster Ovary lines, DHFR minus), HELA (human cervical carcinoma), CVI (monkey kidney line), COS (a derivative of CVI with SV40 T antigen), R1610 (Chinese hamster fibroblast) BALBC/3T3 (mouse fibroblast), HAK (hamster kidney line), SP2/O (mouse myeloma), P3x63-Ag3.653 (mouse myeloma), BFA- IcIBPT (bovine endothelial cells), RAJI (human lymphocyte) and 293 (human kidney). Host cell lines are typically available from commercial services, the American Tissue Culture Collection or from published literature.
[0255] Expression of polypeptides from production cell lines can be enhanced using known techniques. For example, the glutamine synthetase (GS) system is commonly used for enhancing expression under certain conditions. See, e.g., European Patent Nos. 0 216 846, 0 256 055, and 0 323 997 and European Patent Application No. 89303964.4.
Host Cells
[0256] Host cells for expression of an NgRl antagonist for use in a method of the invention may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic. Exemplary eukaryotic host cells include, but are not limited to, yeast and mammalian cells, e.g., Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells (ATCC Accession No. CCL61), NIH Swiss mouse embryo cells NIH~3T3 (ATCC Accession No. CRL1658), and baby hamster kidney cells (BHK). Other useful eukaryotic host cells include insect cells and plant cells. Exemplary prokaryotic host cells are E. coli and Streptomyces.
Gene Therapy
[0257] An NgRl antagonist can be produced in vivo in a mammal, e.g., a human patient, using a gene-therapy approach to treatment of a nervous-system disease, disorder or injury in which promoting survival of oligodendrocytes or reduce demyelination of neurons would be therapeutically beneficial. This involves administration of a suitable NgRl antagonist- encoding nucleic acid operably linked to suitable expression control sequences. Generally, these sequences are incorporated into a viral vector. Suitable viral vectors for such gene therapy include an adenoviral vector, an alphavirus vector, an enterovirus vector, a pestivirus vector, a lentiviral vector, a baculoviral vector, a herpesvirus vector, an Epstein Barr viral vector, a papovaviral vector, a poxvirus vector, a vaccinia viral vector, adeno-associated viral vector and a herpes simplex viral vector. The viral vector can be a replication-defective viral
- 69 -
vector. Adenoviral vectors that have a deletion in their El gene or E3 gene are typically used. When an adenoviral vector is used, the vector usually does not have a selectable marker gene.
Pharmaceutical Compositions
[0258] The NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention may be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions for administration to mammals, including humans. The pharmaceutical compositions used in the methods of this invention comprise pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, including, e.g., ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins, such as human serum albumin, buffer substances such as phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes, such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, zinc salts, colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, cellulose-based substances, polyethylene glycol, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, polyethylene glycol and wool fat.
[0259] The compositions used in the methods of the present invention may be administered by any suitable method, e.g., parenterally, intraventricularly, orally, by inhalation spray, topically, rectally, nasally, buccally, vaginally or via an implanted reservoir. The term "parenteral" as used herein includes subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques. As described previously, NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention act in the nervous system to promote survival of oligodendrocytes and recdue demyelination of neurons. Accordingly, in the methods of the invention, the NgRl antagonists are administered in such a way that they cross the blood-brain barrier. This crossing can result from the physico-chemical properties inherent in the NgRl antagonist molecule itself, from other components in a pharmaceutical formulation, or from the use of a mechanical device such as a needle, cannula or surgical instruments to breach the blood-brain barrier. Where the NgRl antagonist is a molecule that does not inherently cross the blood-brain barrier, e.g., a fusion to a moiety that facilitates the crossing, suitable routes of administration are, e.g., intrathecal or intracranial, e.g., directly into a chronic lesion of MS. Where the NgRl antagonist is a molecule that inherently crosses the blood-brain barrier, the route of administration may be by one or more of the various routes described below. [0260] Sterile injectable forms of the compositions used in the methods of this invention may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension. These suspensions may be formulated according to
- 70 -
techniques known in the art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
The sterile, injectable preparation may also be a sterile, injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a suspension in 1,3- butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose, any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides. Fatty acids, such as oleic acid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation of injectables, as are natural pharmaceutically acceptable oils, such as olive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions. These oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant, such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions. Other commonly used surfactants, such as Tweens, Spans and other emulsifying agents or bioavailability enhancers which are commonly used in the manufacture of pharmaceutically acceptable solid, liquid, or other dosage forms may also be used for the purposes of formulation.
[0261] Parenteral formulations may be a single bolus dose, an infusion or a loading bolus dose followed with a maintenance dose. These compositions may be administered at specific fixed or variable intervals, e.g., once a day, or on an "as needed" basis.
[0262] Certain pharmaceutical compositions used in the methods of this invention may be orally administered in an acceptable dosage form including, e.g., capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions. Certain pharmaceutical compositions also may be administered by nasal aerosol or inhalation. Such compositions may be prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersing agents. [0263] The amount of an NgRl antagonist that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated, the type of antagonist used and the particular mode of administration. The composition may be administered as a single dose, multiple doses or over an established period of time in an infusion. Dosage regimens also may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic or prophylactic response).
[0264] The methods of the invention use a "therapeutically effective amount" or a "prophylactically effective amount" of an NgRl antagonist. Such a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount may vary according to factors such as the disease state, age,
- 71 -
sex, and weight of the individual. A therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount is also one in which any toxic or detrimental effects are outweighed by the therapeutically beneficial effects.
[0265] A specific dosage and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the particular NgRl antagonist used, the patient's age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet, and the time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the severity of the particular disease being treated. Judgment of such factors by medical caregivers is within the ordinary skill in the art. The amount will also depend on the individual patient to be treated, the route of administration, the type of formulation, the characteristics of the compound used, the severity of the disease, and the desired effect. The amount used can be determined by pharmacological and pharmacokinetic principles well known in the art.
[0266] In the methods of the invention the NgRl antagonists are generally administered directly to the nervous system, intracerebroventricularly, or intrathecally, e.g. into a chronic lesion of MS. Compositions for administration according to the methods of the invention can be formulated so that a dosage of 0.001 — 10 mg/kg body weight per day of the NgRl antagonist polypeptide is administered. In some embodiments of the invention, the dosage is 0.01 — 1.0 mg/kg body weight per day. In some embodiments, the dosage is 0.001 — 0.5 mg/kg body weight per day.
[0267] For treatment with an NgRl antagonist antibody, the dosage can range, e.g. , from about 0.0001 to 100 mg/kg, and more usually 0.01 to 5 mg/kg (e.g., 0.02 mg/kg, 0.25 mg/kg, 0.5 mg/kg, 0.75 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg, 2 mg/kg, etc.), of the host body weight. For example dosages can be 1 mg/kg body weight or 10 mg/kg body weight or within the range of 1-10 mg/kg, preferably at least 1 mg/kg. Doses intermediate in the above ranges are also intended to be within the scope of the invention. Subjects can be administered such doses daily, on alternative days, weekly or according to any other schedule determined by empirical analysis. An exemplary treatment entails administration in multiple dosages over a prolonged period, for example, of at least six months. Additional exemplary treatment regimes entail administration once per every two weeks or once a month or once every 3 to 6 months. Exemplary dosage schedules include 1-10 mg/kg or 15 mg/kg on consecutive days, 30 mg/kg on alternate days or 60 mg/kg weekly. In some methods, two or more monoclonal antibodies with different binding specificities are administered simultaneously, in which case the dosage of each antibody administered falls within the ranges indicated.
- 72 -
[0268] In certain embodiments, a subject can be treated with a nucleic acid molecule encoding a NgRl antagonist polynucleotide. Doses for nucleic acids range from about 10 ng to 1 g, 100 ng to 100 mg, 1 μg to 10 mg, or 30-300 μg DNA per patient. Doses for infectious viral vectors vary from 10-100, or more, virions per dose.
[0269] Supplementary active compounds also can be incorporated into the compositions used in the methods of the invention. For example, a soluble NgRl polypeptide or a fusion protein may be coformulated with and/or coadministered with one or more additional therapeutic agents.
[0270] The invention encompasses any suitable delivery method for an NgRl antagonist to a selected target tissue, including bolus injection of an aqueous solution or implantation of a controlled-release system. Use of a controlled-release implant reduces the need for repeat injections.
[0271] The NgRl antagonists used in the methods of the invention may be directly infused into the brain. Various implants for direct brain infusion of compounds are known and are effective in the delivery of therapeutic compounds to human patients suffering from neurological disorders. These include chronic infusion into the brain using a pump, stereotactically implanted, temporary interstitial catheters, permanent intracranial catheter implants, and surgically implanted biodegradable implants. See, e.g., Gill et al, supra; Scharfen et al, "High Activity Iodine-125 Interstitial Implant For Gliomas," Int. J. Radiation Oncology Biol Phys. 24(4):583-591 (1992); Gaspar et al, "Permanent 1251 Implants for Recurrent Malignant Gliomas," Int. J. Radiation Oncology Biol. Phys. 4?(5):977-982 (1999); chapter 66, pages 577-580, Bellezza et al, "Stereotactic Interstitial Brachytherapy," in Gildenberg et al, Textbook of Stereotactic and Functional Neurosurgery, McGraw-Hill (1998); and Brem et al, "The Safety of Interstitial Chemotherapy with BCNU-Loaded Polymer Followed by Radiation Therapy in the Treatment of Newly Diagnosed Malignant Gliomas: Phase I Trial," J. Neuro-Oncology 26:111-23 (1995).
[0272] The compositions may also comprise a NgRl antagonist dispersed in a biocompatible carrier material that functions as a suitable delivery or support system for the compounds. Suitable examples of sustained release carriers include semipermeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles such as suppositories or capsules. Implantable or microcapsular sustained release matrices include polylactides (U.S. Patent No. 3,773,319; EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma- ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al, Biopolvmers 22:547-56 (1985)); poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), ethylene vinyl acetate
- 73 -
(Langer et al, J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 75:167-277 (1981); Langer, Chem. Tech. /.2:98-105
(1982)) orpoly-D-(-)-3hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988).
[0273] In some embodiments of the invention, an NgRl antagonist is administered to a patient by direct infusion into an appropriate region of the brain. See, e.g., Gill et al., "Direct brain infusion of glial cell line-derived neurotrophic factor in Parkinson disease," Nature Med. 9: 589-95 (2003). Alternative techniques are available and may be applied to administer an NgRl antagonist according to the invention. For example, stereotactic placement of a catheter or implant can be accomplished using the Riechert-Mundinger unit and the ZD (Zamorano- Dujovny) multipurpose localizing unit. A contrast-enhanced computerized tomography (CT) scan, injecting 120 ml of omnipaque, 350 mg iodine/ml, with 2 mm slice thickness can allow three-dimensional multiplanar treatment planning (STP, Fischer, Freiburg, Germany). This equipment permits planning on the basis of magnetic resonance imaging studies, merging the CT and MRI target information for clear target confirmation.
[0274] The Leksell stereotactic system (Downs Surgical, Inc., Decatur, GA) modified for use with a GE CT scanner (General Electric Company, Milwaukee, WI) as well as the Brown- Roberts- Wells (BRW) stereotactic system (Radionics, Burlington, MA) can be used for this purpose. Thus, on the morning of the implant, the annular base ring of the BRW stereotactic frame can be attached to the patient's skull. Serial CT sections can be obtained at 3 mm intervals though the (target tissue) region with a graphite rod localizer frame clamped to the base plate. A computerized treatment planning program can be run on a VAX 11/780 computer (Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Mass.) using CT coordinates of the graphite rod images to map between CT space and BRW space.
[0275] The methods of treatment of demyelination or dysmyelination disorders as described herein are typically tested in vitro, and then in vivo in an acceptable animal model, for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans. Suitable animal models, including transgenic animals, are will known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In vivo tests can be performed by creating transgenic mice which express the NgRl antagonist or by administering the NgRl antagonist to mice or rats in models as described in the Examples. [0276] The practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of cell biology, cell culture, molecular biology, transgenic biology, microbiology, recombinant DNA, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, for example, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (3-Volume Set), J. Sambrook, D. W. Russell, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press (2001); Genes VIII, B. Lewin, Prentice Hall (2003); PCR Primer, CW.
- 74 -
Dieffenbach and G.S. Dveksler, CSHL Press (2003); DNA Cloning, D. N. Glover ed., Volumes I and II (1985); Oligonucleotide Synthesis: Methods and Applications (Methods in Molecular Biology), P. Herdewijn (Ed.), Humana Press (2004); Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique, 4th edition, R. I. Freshney, Wiley-Liss (2000); Oligonucleotide Synthesis, M. J. Gait (Ed.), (1984); Mullis et al. U.S. Pat. No: 4,683,195; Nucleic Acid Hybridization, B. D. Hames & S. J. Higgins eds. (1984); Nucleic Acid Hybridization, M. L. M. Anderson, Springer (1999); Animal Cell Culture and Technology, 2nd edition, M. Butler, BIOS Scientific Publishers (2004); Immobilized Cells and Enzymes: A Practical Approach (Practical Approach Series), J. Woodward, IrI Pr (1992); Transcription And Translation, B. D. Hames & S. J. Higgins (Eds.) (1984); Culture Of Animal Cells, R. I. Freshney, Alan R. Liss, Inc., (1987); Immobilized Cells And Enzymes, IRL Press, (1986); A Practical Guide To Molecular Cloning, 3rd edition, B. Perbal, John Wiley & Sons Inc. (1988); the treatise, Methods In Enzymology, Academic Press, Inc., N. Y.; Gene Transfer Vectors For Mammalian Cells, J. H. Miller and M. P. Calos eds., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory (1987); Methods In Enzymology, VoIs. 154 and 155, Wu et al. (Eds.); Immunochemical Methods In Cell And Molecular Biology, Mayer and Walker, (Eds.), Academic Press, London (1987); Handbook Of Experimental Immunology, Volumes I-IV, D. M. Weir and C. C. Blackwell (Eds.), (1986); Immunology Methods Manual: The Comprehensive Sourcebook of Techniques (4 Volume Set), 1st edition, I. Lefkovits, Academic Press (1997); Manipulating the Mouse Embryo: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press (2002); and in Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley and Sons, Baltimore, Maryland (1989).
[0277] General principles of antibody engineering are set forth in Antibody Engineering: Methods and Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology), B.L. Lo (Ed.), Humana Press (2003); Antibody engineering, R. Kontermann and S. Dubel (Eds.), Springer Verlag (2001); Antibody Engineering, 2nd edition, C.A.K. Borrebaeck (Ed.), Oxford Univ. Press (1995). General principles of protein engineering are set forth in Protein Engineering, A Practical Approach, Rickwood, D., et al. (Eds.), IRL Press at Oxford Univ. Press, Oxford, Eng. (1995). General principles of antibodies and antibody-hapten binding are set forth in: Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, E. Harlow and D. Lane, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press (1988); Nisonoff, A., Molecular Immunology, 2nd edition, Sinauer Associates, Sunderland, MA (1984); and Steward, M.W., Antibodies, Their Structure and Function, Chapman and Hall, New York, NY (1984). Additionally, standard methods in immunology known in the art and not specifically described are generally followed as in Current Protocols in Immunology, John Wiley & Sons,
- 75 -
New York; Stites et al. (Eds.) , Immunochemical Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology), 2nd edition, J. D. Pound (Ed.), Humana Press (1998), Weir's Handbook of Experimental Immunology, 5th edition, D. M. Weir (Ed.), Blackwell Publishers (1996), Methods in Cellular Immunology, 2nd edition, R. Fernandez-Botran, CRC Press (2001); Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT (1994) and Mishell and Shiigi (Eds.), Selected Methods in Cellular Immunology, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York (1980). [0278] Standard reference works setting forth general principles of immunology include Current Protocols in Immunology, John Wiley & Sons, New York; Klein, J.; Kuby Immunology, 4th edition, R. A. Goldsby, et al., H. Freeman & Co. (2000); Basic and Clinical Immunology, M. Peakman, et al., Churchill Livingstone (1997); Immunology, 6th edition, I. Roitt, et al., Mosby, London (2001); Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 5th edition; A.K. Abbas, A.H. Lichtman, Elsevier - Health Sciences Division (2005); Immunology Methods Manual: The Comprehensive Sourcebook of Techniques (4 Volume Set), 1st edition, I. Lefkovits, Academic Press (1997) Immunology, 5th edition, R. A. Goldsby, et al., W. H. Freeman (2002); Monoclonal Antibodies : Principles and Practice, 3rd Edition , J. W. Goding, Academic Press (1996); Immunology: The Science of Self-Nonself Discrimination, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1982); Kennett, R., et al. (Eds.), Monoclonal Antibodies, Hybridoma: A New Dimension in Biological Analyses, Plenum Press, New York (1980); Campbell, A., "Monoclonal Antibody Technology" in Burden, R., et al. (Eds.), Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Vol. 13, Elsevere, Amsterdam (1984). [0279] All of. the references cited above, as well as all references cited herein, are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
EXAMPLES
[0280] The invention is further illustrated by the followng experimental examples. The examples are provided for illustrative purposes only, and are not to be construed as limiting the scope or content of the invention in any way.
EXAMPLE 1
NgRl -310-Fc reduces apoptotic cell death induced by spinal cord transection injury in rat
[0281] Oligodendrocytes undergo apoptotic cell death following spinal cord injury (SCI). Thus, NgRl-310-Fc was evaluated for its ability to prevent apoptotic cell death after SCI. Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl -310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by continuous intrathecal infusion via an osmotic minipump implanted
- 76 -
in the subcutaneous space. See Ji et al., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(3):587-594 (2005). Hoechst 33342 (Sigma) and TUNEL staining (Promega) were performed on the spinal cord sections (5 mm rostral and 5 mm caudal to the lesion site) which were collected 3 days and 7 days after SCI, respectively and the TUNEL positive cells, apoptotic cells, were counted. The number of apoptotic cells were significantly reduced in the spinal cord of NgRl-Ig treated rats compared with PBS treated controls (*P< 0.05, t test, n=3). Figure IA-B. These results showed that NgRl (31O)-Fc significantly reduced apoptotic death of oligodendrocytes after SCI.
EXAMPLE !
NgRl -310-Fc inhibits SAPK/JNK phosphorylation and increases AKT activity
[0282] p75 neurotrophin receptor (p75NTR)-dependent apoptosis of oligodendrocytes is associated with an increase in Jun kinase (JNK) activity and caspase activation. Bhakar et al., J. Neuroscience 23(26):11373-11381 (2003). In addition, Akt has been shown to negatively regulates apoptotic pathways through phosphorylation. Dan et al., J. Biol. Chem, 27P(7):5405- 5412 (2004). Thus, NgRl-310-Fc was evaluated for its ability to decrease SAPK/JNK phosphorylation and increases AKT activity. Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl-310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by continuous intrathecal infusion via an osmotic minipump implanted in the subcutaneous space. See Ji et al., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(3):587-594 (2005). Spinal cord tissue from around the lesion area was harvested 3 days after injury and protein was extracted for Western blot analysis. Blots were probed with anti-JNK, anti-phospho-JNK, anti-AKT or anti-phospho-AKT antibodies available from, e.g., Cell Signalling Technologies. The expression levels of these proteins were quantified by densitometry and the level of the phosphorylated (activated) forms expressed as a ratio of total JNK or AKT levels. Figure 2A-B. NgRl-Ig treatment significantly reduced the level of phospho-JNK expression and significantly increased the level of phospho-AKT in spinal cord homegenates indicating that NgRl-Ig treatment inhibits oligodendrocyte cell death after SCI.
EXAMPLE 3
NgRl-310-Fc inhibits caspase-3 activation in oligodendrocytes following spinal cord injury
[0283] As described above, p75 neurotrophin receptor (p75NTR)-dependent apoptosis of oligodendrocytes is associated with an increase in Jun kinase (JNK) activity and caspase activation. Bhakar et al, J. Neuroscience 23(26):! 1373-11381 (2003). Thus, NgRl-310-Fc was evaluated for its ability to inhibit caspase-3 activation. Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl-310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by
- 77 -
continuous intrathecal infusion via an osmotic minipump implanted in the subcutaneous space. See Ji et a!., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(3):587-594 (2005). The spinal cord sections from the rats 3 and 7 days after SCI were double stained with anti-cleaved caspase-3 antibody (Cell Signalling Technologies) and the oligodendrocyte specific marker, CCl (Calbiochem), with Hoechst counter staining (Sigma). Cell counts were performed in the area of 0.25 mm2 at 5 mm and 15 mm rostral and caudal to the lesion site, respectively. The level of activated caspase-3 expression in oligodendrocytes expressed as the ratio of the number of cells with both CCl and caspase-3 positive to total number of CCl positive cells was determined. The results showed that caspase-3 activation was significantly inhibited in NgRl-Ig treated rats when compared to PBS treated controls, (Figure 3 A-B) indicating reduced oligodendrocyte cell death after NgRl- Ig treatment in the injured spinal cord.
EXAMPLE 4
NgR 1-310-Fc treatment reduces degraded myelin basic protein (dMBP) expression in spinal cord after spinal cord injury
[0284] Oligodendrocytes undergo apoptotic cell death following spinal cord injury (SCI), which may contribute to demyelination of survived axons. dMBP is an indicator of a decrease in myelination. Long Evans rats underwent T6 hemitransection injury and NgRl -310-Fc was administered from the time of injury by continuous intrathecal infusion via an osmotic minipump implanted in the subcutaneous space. See Ji et al., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(3):587-594 (2005). Spinal cord sections from rats 28 days after SCI were stained with anti-degraded myelin basin protein (dMBP) (Chemicon). Quantification of the dMBP expressed as a histological score revealed that there were significantly less number of cells postively stained in the NgRl-Ig treated group compared to the PBS treated controls. Figure 4. These data demonstrated that NgRl-Ig treatment inhibits oligodendrocyte cell death after SCI. [0285] Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.
[0286] All publications and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
- 78 -
Claims
1. A method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes, comprising contacting said oligodendrocytes with an effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
(iii) an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
2. A method for reducing demyelination of neurons, comprising contacting' a mixture of neurons and oligodendrocytes with a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
(iii) an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
3. A method for promoting survival of oligodendrocytes in a mammal, comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof an effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
- 79 - (iii) an. NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
4. A method for reducing demyelination of neurons in a mammal, comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof an effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
(iii) an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
5. A method for treating a disease, disorder, or injury associated with dysmyelination or demyelination in a mammal comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
(iii) an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
6. A method for treating a disease, disorder, or injury associated with oligodendrocyte death in a mammal comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising an NgRl antagonist selected from the group consisting of:
- 80 - (i) a soluble NgRl polypeptide;
(ii) an NgRl antibody or fragment thereof;
(iii) an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide,
(iv) an NgRl aptamer, and
(v) a combination of two or more of said NgRl antagonists.
7. The method of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein said NgRl antagonist comprises a soluble NgRl polypeptide.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide is 90% identical to a reference amino acid sequence is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2
(ii) amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2
(iii) amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(iv) amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(v) amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vi) amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vii) amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(viii) amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(ix) amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(x) amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2; and
(xi) a combination of one ore more of said reference amino acid sequences.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2 (ii) amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2 (iii) amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
- 81 - (iv) amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(v) amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vi) amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vii) amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(viii) amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(ix) amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(x) amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(xi) variants or derivatives of any of said polypeptide fragments; and
(xii) a combination of at least two of said polypeptide fragments or variants or derivatives thereof.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide comprises amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2.
11. The method of claim 9, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide comprises amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2.
12. The method of any one of claims 7 to 11, wherein at least one cysteine residue of said soluble NgRl polypeptide is substituted with a different amino acid.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein said at least one cysteine residue is C266.
14. The method of claim 12, wherein said at least one cysteine residue is C309.
15. The method of claim 12, wherein said at least one cysteine residue is at C335.
16. The method of claim 12, wherein said at least one cysteine residue is at C336.
17. The method of claim 12, wherein said different amino acid is selected from the group consisting of: alanine, serine and threonine.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein said different amino acid is alanine.
19. The method of any one of claims 7 to 18, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide is a cyclic polypeptide.
- 82 -
20. The method of claim 19, wherein said cyclic polypeptide further comprises a first molecule linked at the N-terminus and a second molecule linked at the C-terminus; wherein said first molecule and said second molecule are joined to each other to form said cyclic molecule.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein said first and second molecules are selected from the group consisting of: a biotin molecule, a cysteine residue, and an acetylated cysteine residue.
22. The method of claim 21 , wherein said first molecule is a biotin molecule attached to the N-terminus and said second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of said polypeptide.
23. The method of claim 21, wherein said first molecule is an acetylated cysteine residue attached to the N-terminus and said second molecule is a cysteine residue attached to the C-terminus of said polypeptide.
24. The method of claim 22 or claim 23, wherein said C-terminal cysteine has an NH2 moiety attached.
25. The method of any one of claims 7 to 24, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide further comprises a non-NgRl moiety.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein said non-NgRl moiety is a polypeptide fused to said soluble NgRl polypeptide.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein said non-NgRl moiety is selected from the group consisting of an antibody Ig moiety, a serum albumin moiety, a targeting moiety, a reporter moiety, and a purification-facilitating moiety.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein said non-NgRl moiety is an antibody Ig moiety.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein said antibody Ig moiety is a hinge and Fc moiety.
- 83 -
30. The method of claim 25, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide is conjugated to a polymer.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the polymer is selected from the group consisting of a polyalkylene glycol, a sugar polymer, and a polypeptide.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the polymer is a polyalkylene glycol.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the polyalkylene glycol is polyethylene glycol (PEG).
34. The method of claim 30, wherein said soluble NgRl polypeptide is conjugated to 1, 2, 3 or 4 polymers.
35. The method of claim 34, wherein the total molecular weight of the polymers is from 5,000 Da to 100,000 Da.
36. The method of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein said NgRl antagonist comprises an NgRl antibody, or fragment thereof.
37. The method of claim 36, wherein said NgRl antibody, or fragment thereof specifically binds to a polypeptide fragment selected from the group consisting of:
(i) amino acids 26 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2
(ii) amino acids 26 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2
(iii) amino acids 27 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(iv) amino acids 27 to 344 of SEQ BD NO:2;
(v) amino acids 27 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vi) amino acids 27 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(vii) amino acids 1 to 310 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(viii) amino acids 1 to 344 of SEQ ID NO:2;
(ix) amino acids 1 to 445 of SEQ ID NO:2; and
(x) amino acids 1 to 309 of SEQ ID NO:2.
- 84 -
38. The method of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein said NgRl antagonist comprises an NgRl antagonist polynucleotide.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein said NgRl antagonist polynucleotide is selected from the group consisting of:
(i) an antisense polynucleotide;
(ii) a ribozyme;
(iii) a small interfering RNA (siRNA); and
(iv) a small-hairpin RNA (shRNA).
40. The method of claim 39, wherein said NgRl antagonist polynucleotide is an antisense polynucleotide comprising at least 10 bases complementary to the coding portion of the mRNA.
41. The method of claim 39, wherein said NgRl antagonist polynucleotide is a ribozyme.
42. The method of claim 39, wherein said NgRl antagonist polynucleotide is a siRNA.
43. The method of claim 39, wherein said NgRl antagonist polynucleotide is a shRNA
44. The method of claim 42 or 43, wherein said siRNA or shRNA inhibits NgRl expression.
45. The method of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises a polynucleotide sequence at least 90% identical to: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8).
46. The method of claim 45, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises the nucleotide sequence: CUACUUCUCCCGCAGGCGA (SEQ ID NO:8).
47. The method of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises a nucleotide sequence complementary to the mRNA produced by a polynucleotide comprising the sequence: GATGAAGAGGGCGTCCGCT (SEQ ID NO:9).
48. The method of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises a nucleotide sequence at least 90% identical to: CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO: 10).
- 85 -
49. The method of claim 48, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises the nucleotide sequence: CCCGGACCGACGUCUUCAA (SEQ ID NO:10).
50. The method, of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises a nucleotide sequence complementary to the mRNA produced by a polynucleotide comprising the sequence: GGGCCTGGCTGCAGAAGTT (SEQ ID NO: 11).
51. The method of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprising a nucleotide sequence at least 90% identical to: CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
52. The method of claim 51, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises the nucleotide sequence: CUGACCACUGAGUCUUCCG (SEQ ID NO: 12).
53. The method of claim 44, wherein said siRNA or shRNA comprises a nucleotide sequence complementary to the mRNA produced by a polynucleotide comprising the sequence: GACTGGTGACTCAGAAGGC(SEQ ID NO: 13).
54. The method of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein said NgRl antagonist comprises an NgRl aptamer.
55. The method of any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein said mammal has been diagnosed with a disease, disorder, or injury involving demyelination, dysmyelination, or neurodegeneration.
56. The method of any one of claims 5 to 6 or 55, wherein said disease, disorder, or injury is selected from the group consisting of spinal cord injury (SCI), multiple sclerosis (MS), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), encephalomyelitis (EPL), central pontine myelolysis (CPM), adrenoleukodystrophy, Alexander's disease, Pelizaeus Merzbacher disease (PMZ)5 Wallerian Degeneration, optic neuritis, transverse myelitis, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, post radiation injury, neurologic complications of chemotherapy, stroke, acute ischemic optic neuropathy, vitamin E deficiency, isolated vitamin E deficiency syndrome, AR, Bassen-Kornzweig syndrome, Marchiafava-Bignami syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, and Bell's palsy.
- 86 -
57. The method of claim 56, wherein said disease, disorder, or injury is spinal cord injury
(SCI).
58. The method any one of claims 3 to 57, wherein said NgRl antagonist is administered by bolus injection or chronic infusion.
59. The method of claim 58, wherein said NgRl antagonist is administered directly into the central nervous system.
60. The method of claim 59, wherein said antagonist is administered directly into a chronic lesion of MS.
61. The method of any one of claims 1 or 2, comprising (a) transfecting said oligodendrocytes with a polynucleotide which encodes said NgRl antagonist through operable linkage to an expression control sequence, and (b) allowing expression of said NgRl antagonist.
62. The method of any one of claims 3 to 57, comprising (a) administering to said mammal a polynucleotide which encodes said NgRl antagonist through operable linkage to an expression control sequence, and (b) allowing expression of said NgRl antagonist.
63. The method of claim 62, wherein said polynucleotide is administered as an expression vector.
64. The method of claim 63 , wherein said expression vector is a viral vector.
65. The method of any one of claims 3 to 57, wherein said administering comprises (a) providing a cultured host cell comprising said polynucleotide, wherein said cultured host cell expresses said NgRl antagonist; and (Jo) introducing said cultured host cell into said mammal such that said NgRl antagonist is expressed in said mammal.
66. The method of claim 65, wherein said cultured host cell is introduced into said mammal at or near the site of the nervous-system disease, disorder or injury.
67. The method of claim 65 or claim 66, wherein said cultured host cell is made by a method comprising (a) transforming or transfecting a recipient host cell with the polynucleotide of claim 62 or the vector of claim 64, and (b) culturing said transformed or transfected host cell.
- 87 -
68. The method of any one of claims 65 to 67, wherein said cultured host cell is derived from the mammal to be treated.
69. The method of any one of claims 3 to 68, wherein said NgRl antagonist is expressed in an amount sufficient to reduce inhibition of oligodendrocyte survival at or near the site of the nervous system disease, disorder, or injury.
70. The method of any one of claims 3 to 69, wherein said NgRl antagonist is expressed in an amount sufficient to reduce demyelination at or near the site of the nervous system disease, disorder, or injury.
71. The method of claim 64, wherein the viral vector is selected from the group consisting of an adenoviral vector, an alphavirus vector, an enterovirus vector, a pestivirus vector, a lentivirus vector, a baculovirus vector, a herpesvirus vector, a papovavirus vector, and a poxvirus vector.
72. The method of claim 71, wherein said herpesvirus vector is selected from the group consisting of a herpes simplex virus vector and an Epstein Barr virus vector.
73. The method of claim 71 , wherein said poxvirus vector is a vaccinia virus vector.
74. The method of any one of claims 63, 64, or 71 to 73, wherein said vector is administered by a route selected from the group consisting of topical administration, intraocular administration, parenteral administration, intrathecal administration, subdural administration and subcutaneous administration.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/300,933 US20110123535A1 (en) | 2006-05-15 | 2007-05-15 | Use of Nogo Receptor-1 (NGR1) for Promoting Oligodendrocyte Survival |
EP07777039A EP2023735A4 (en) | 2006-05-15 | 2007-05-15 | Use of nogo receptor-1 (ngr1) antagonists for promoting oligodendrocyte survival |
JP2009511015A JP2009538282A (en) | 2006-05-15 | 2007-05-15 | Use of Nogo receptor-1 (NgR1) antagonists to promote oligodendrocyte survival |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US80000806P | 2006-05-15 | 2006-05-15 | |
US60/800,008 | 2006-05-15 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2007133746A2 true WO2007133746A2 (en) | 2007-11-22 |
WO2007133746A3 WO2007133746A3 (en) | 2008-03-20 |
Family
ID=38694527
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2007/011557 WO2007133746A2 (en) | 2006-05-15 | 2007-05-15 | Use of nogo receptor-1 (ngr1) antagonists for promoting oligodendrocyte survival |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20110123535A1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP2023735A4 (en) |
JP (1) | JP2009538282A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2007133746A2 (en) |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009114197A2 (en) * | 2008-03-13 | 2009-09-17 | Yale University | Reactivation of axon growth and recovery in chronic spinal cord injury |
WO2016197009A1 (en) | 2015-06-05 | 2016-12-08 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Triazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106641A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Pyrazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106646A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Aminotriazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106643A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Heterocyclic azoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CA2660732A1 (en) * | 2006-08-31 | 2008-03-06 | Biogen Idec Ma Inc. | Methods relating to peripheral administration of nogo receptor polypeptides |
Family Cites Families (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
ATE124726T1 (en) * | 1988-11-04 | 1995-07-15 | Zuerich Erziehungsdirektion | GROWTH REGULATION FACTORS FOR NEURITES. |
CA1341050C (en) * | 1988-11-04 | 2000-07-11 | Martin E. Schwab | Neurite growth regulatory factors |
US5250414A (en) * | 1988-11-04 | 1993-10-05 | Erziehungsdirektion Of The Canton Zurich | Diagnostic methods using neurite growth regulatory factors |
ES2297861T3 (en) * | 1996-07-12 | 2008-05-01 | Mcgill University | COMPOUNDS AND METHODS TO MODULATE CELL ADHESION. |
US5858708A (en) * | 1996-08-12 | 1999-01-12 | Bandman; Olga | Polynucleotides encoding two novel human neuroendocrine-specific proteins |
JP2002518010A (en) * | 1998-06-16 | 2002-06-25 | ヒューマン ジノーム サイエンシーズ, インコーポレイテッド | 94 human secreted proteins |
US7041474B2 (en) * | 1998-12-30 | 2006-05-09 | Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Nucleic acid encoding human tango 509 |
US7119165B2 (en) * | 2000-01-12 | 2006-10-10 | Yale University | Nogo receptor-mediated blockade of axonal growth |
ES2341842T3 (en) * | 2000-01-12 | 2010-06-29 | Yale University | BLOCK OF AXONAL GROWTH MEDIATED BY THE NOGO RECEIVER. |
CA2424834A1 (en) * | 2000-10-06 | 2002-04-11 | Yale University | Nogo receptor homologs |
WO2003035687A1 (en) * | 2001-10-22 | 2003-05-01 | Novartis Ag | Nogo receptor homologues and their use |
US7309485B2 (en) * | 2001-12-03 | 2007-12-18 | Children's Medical Center Corporation | Reducing myelin-mediated inhibition of axon regeneration |
US20030113325A1 (en) * | 2001-12-03 | 2003-06-19 | Zhigang He | Reducing myelin-mediated inhibition of axon regeneration |
US7745151B2 (en) * | 2002-08-02 | 2010-06-29 | Children's Medical Center Corporation | Methods of determining binding between Nogo receptor and p75 neurotrophin receptor |
WO2004014311A2 (en) * | 2002-08-10 | 2004-02-19 | Yale University | Nogo receptor antagonists |
EA008253B1 (en) * | 2003-08-07 | 2007-04-27 | Байоджен Айдек Ма Инк. | Nogo receptor antagonists |
RS52593B (en) * | 2004-06-24 | 2013-04-30 | Biogen Idec Ma Inc. | Treatment of conditions involving demyelination |
FR2900996B1 (en) * | 2006-05-12 | 2008-08-08 | Skf Ab | CAGE FOR BALL BEARING |
-
2007
- 2007-05-15 EP EP07777039A patent/EP2023735A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2007-05-15 US US12/300,933 patent/US20110123535A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-05-15 JP JP2009511015A patent/JP2009538282A/en active Pending
- 2007-05-15 WO PCT/US2007/011557 patent/WO2007133746A2/en active Application Filing
Non-Patent Citations (20)
Title |
---|
BERNSTEIN ET AL., NATURE, vol. 409, 2001, pages 363 - 366 |
BERTRAND ET AL., BIOCHEM BIOPHYS RES COMMUN, vol. 296, 2002, pages 1000 - 1004 |
BOUTIA ET AL., CURR BIOL, vol. 11, 2001, pages 1776 - 1780 |
CALEGARI ET AL., PROC NATL ACAD SCI USA, vol. 99, 2002, pages 14236 - 14240 |
CAPODICI ET AL., J IMMUNOL, vol. 169, 2002, pages 5196 - 5201 |
DONZEET ET AL., NUCLEIC ACIDS RES, vol. 30, 2002, pages E46 |
ELBASHIR ET AL., METHODS, vol. 26, 2002, pages 199 - 213 |
GITLIN ET AL., NATURE, vol. 418, 2002, pages 379 - 380 |
HARBORTH ET AL., J CELL SCI, vol. 114, 2001, pages 4557 - 4565 |
HOHJOH, FEBS LETT, vol. 521, 2002, pages 195 - 199 |
KRICHEVSKY ET AL., PROC NATL ACAD SCI USA, vol. 99, 2002, pages 11926 - 11929 |
LASSUS ET AL., SCI STKE, no. 147, 2002, pages PL13 |
LEIRDAL ET AL., BIOCHEM BIOPHYS RES COMMUN, vol. 295, 2002, pages 744 - 748 |
LEWIS ET AL., NAT GENET, vol. 32, 2002, pages 107 - 108 |
MCCAFFREY ET AL., NATURE, vol. 418, 2002, pages 38 - 39 |
SCHERR ET AL., BLOOD, vol. 101, no. 4, 2002, pages 1566 - 9 |
See also references of EP2023735A4 |
YANG ET AL., PROC NATL ACAD SCI USA, vol. 99, 2002, pages 9942 - 9947 |
YU ET AL., PROC NATL ACAD SCI USA, vol. 99, 2002, pages 6047 - 6052 |
ZHOU ET AL., NUCLEIC ACIDS RES, vol. 30, 2002, pages 1664 - 1669 |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009114197A2 (en) * | 2008-03-13 | 2009-09-17 | Yale University | Reactivation of axon growth and recovery in chronic spinal cord injury |
WO2009114197A3 (en) * | 2008-03-13 | 2009-12-30 | Yale University | Reactivation of axon growth and recovery in chronic spinal cord injury |
US8992918B2 (en) | 2008-03-13 | 2015-03-31 | Yale University | Reactivation of axon growth and recovery in chronic spinal cord injury |
US20160256524A1 (en) * | 2008-03-13 | 2016-09-08 | Yale University | Reactivation of Axon Growth and Recovery in Chronic Spinal Cord Injury |
WO2016197009A1 (en) | 2015-06-05 | 2016-12-08 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Triazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106641A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Pyrazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106646A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Aminotriazoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
WO2018106643A1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-06-14 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Heterocyclic azoles for the treatment of demyelinating diseases |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2009538282A (en) | 2009-11-05 |
EP2023735A2 (en) | 2009-02-18 |
EP2023735A4 (en) | 2011-05-25 |
US20110123535A1 (en) | 2011-05-26 |
WO2007133746A3 (en) | 2008-03-20 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8642040B2 (en) | Methods for promoting myelination, neuronal survival and oligodendrocyte differentiation via administration of Sp35 or TrkA antagonists | |
EP2217697B1 (en) | Use of lingo-4 antagonists in the treatment of conditions involving demyelination | |
EP1981902B1 (en) | Nogo receptor antagonists | |
US9068992B2 (en) | Screening methods for identifying Sp35 antagonists | |
US8894999B2 (en) | Use of DR6 and p75 antagonists to promote survival of cells of the nervous system | |
AU2006311828B2 (en) | Methods for promoting neurite outgrowth and survival of dopaminergic neurons | |
US20110123535A1 (en) | Use of Nogo Receptor-1 (NGR1) for Promoting Oligodendrocyte Survival |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 07777039 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A2 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2009511015 Country of ref document: JP |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2007777039 Country of ref document: EP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 12300933 Country of ref document: US |